SMALL CONSTRUCTION & RENOVATION DESIGN-BID-BUILD PROJECT MANUAL Version 4/29/2016
Georgia Department of Corrections
FOR
CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADES ARRENDALE STATE PRISON PROJECT NO. GDC-16-093-ARR-SP
January 30, 2017
BIDDING MANAGER: GEORGIA STATE FINANCING AND INVESTMENT COMMISSION 270 Washington Street, Second Floor Atlanta, Georgia 30334
______SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
PROJECT NO. GDC-16-093-ARR-SP
Project Manual Table of Contents
Section A: Bid Requirements
Section B: Construction Contract
Section C: General Conditions & Exhibits
Section D: Supplementary General Conditions
Section E: Technical Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 013516 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 05 - METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220523.12 BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230713 DUCT INSULATION 233113 METAL DUCTS 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
Table of Contents SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
233713.23 AIR REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233716 FABRIC AIR-DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 237416.11 PACKAGED, SMALL-CAPACITY, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
END OF SPECIFICATIONS
Drawings –
DRAWING NO. DRAWING TITLE G-001 COVER SHEET G-002 SITE PLAN - LAY DOWN / HAUL ROUTE S-000 GENERAL NOTES S-100 DEMO AND NEW WORK CEILING PLANS S-101 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-201 SECTIONS AND DETAILS M-001 MECHANICAL LEGEND, NOTES AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION M-101 MECHANICAL FLOOR AND ROOF DEMOLITION PLANS M-201 MECHANICAL FLOOR AND ROOF NEW WORK PLANS M-202 MECHANICAL INTERIOR SECTIONS M-301 MECHANICAL DETAILS M-302 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES P-101 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN, SCHEDULE AND DETAILS E-001 ELECTRICAL SITE, PARTIAL FLOOR AND ROOF PLANS E-101 ELECTRICAL DEMO, NEW WORK LIGHTING AND ONE LINE DIAGRAM
SCAR - Agency Managed Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (07-02-12)
SECTION A: BID REQUIREMENTS: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Bidding Documents. The Bidding Documents consist of the Project Manual, which includes the Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, the General Conditions, Exhibits, the Supplementary General Conditions, Specifications and Drawings, and all Addenda.
2. Bids Shall Comply with Georgia Law and DOAS Georgia Procurement Manual. All bids submitted in response to this Invitation to Bid shall be made in general accordance with the applicable provisions of Georgia Law and the provisions of the DOAS Georgia Procurement Manual that are applicable to Public Works Contracts.
3. Bid Submission. All bids must be submitted on the Bid Form by the time stated in the Invitation to Bid. The blanks on the Bid Form must be completed and all required forms must be enclosed. Failure to complete entries in all blanks in the Bid Form, or any other required form may be considered sufficient cause for rejection of a bid. The inclusion of any condition, alternate, qualification, limitation, or provision not called for may render the bid non-responsive and may be sufficient cause for rejection of a bid.
4. Alternates. Bids must include prices for all specified alternates, if any. If a price is not provided for all alternates the Contractor’s bid may be determined non-responsive and not considered for award. Unless otherwise stipulated all alternates are deductive. Any alternate, or alternates, if taken, will be taken in numerical sequence, starting with Alternate #1, to the extent necessary.
5. Bid Bond Required. Each bid must be accompanied with a BID BOND in an amount equal to 5% of the base bid, payable to the Owner, Georgia Department of Corrections, in order to guarantee that the successful bidder will enter into a contract to construct the project strictly in compliance with the Bidding Documents. Bid Bonds should be furnished on forms accepted as standard by the insurance industry.
6. Withdrawal of Bids. Bids may be withdrawn by bidders prior to the time set for official opening. After bids have been opened, no bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the time and date of opening except as provided in O.C.G.A. §13-10-22 (appreciable error in calculation of bid). Negligence or error on the part of any bidder in preparing its bid confers no right of withdrawal or modification of the bid after bid opening except as provided by Georgia law.
7. Owner’s Right to Reject Bids. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive technicalities and irregularities. The Owner further reserves the right, in its sole and complete discretion, to reject any bid that is over budget and to reject any bid from a bidder that is not responsible. In judging whether the bidder is responsible, the Owner will consider, but is not limited to consideration of, the following:
(a) Whether the bidder or its principals are currently ineligible, debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded from bidding or contracting by any state or federal agency, department, or authority; (b) Whether the bidder or its principals have been terminated for cause or are currently in default on a public works contract; (c) Whether the bidder can demonstrate a commitment to safety with regard to Workers' Compensation by having an Experience Modification Rate (EMR) over the past three years not having exceeded an average of 1.2; and (d) Whether the bidder’s past work provides evidence of an ability to successfully complete public works projects within the established time, quality, or cost, or to comply with the bidder’s contract obligations.
8. Owner’s Right to Negotiate with the Lowest Bidder. In the event all responsive and responsible bids are in excess of the budget, the Owner, in its sole and absolute discretion and in addition to the
Section A - Bid Requirements: Instructions to Bidders SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
rights set forth above, reserves the right to negotiate with the lowest responsive and responsible bidder (after taking all deductive alternates) only for the purpose of making changes to the Project that will result in a cost to the Owner that is within the budget, as it may be amended.
9. Bid Preparation Expenses. All expenses for preparing and submitting bids are the sole cost of the party submitting the bid. The Owner is not obligated to any party to reimburse such expenses. All bids, upon receipt, become the property of Owner.
10. Open Records Act. As required by the Open Records Act, the details of the bids will remain confidential until final award. Labeling information provided in submittals as “proprietary” or “confidential,” or any other designation of restricted use will not protect the information from public view unless it is otherwise not subject to disclosure under the Open Records Act.
11. Award. The Contract will be awarded, if at all, on a lump sum basis to the lowest responsible, responsive bidder. The lowest bid will be the bid whose price, after incorporating all accepted alternates, is the lowest responsive bid which was received from a responsible bidder.
12. Contract Form and Bonds. The Contract, if awarded, will be substantially in accordance with the Contract shown in the Bidding Documents. If a Contract is awarded, the successful bidder shall be required to execute the Contract and return it to the Owner within ten (10) business days. The successful bidder shall also be required to furnish payment and performance bonds, both in amounts equal to 100% of the Contract sum along with the executed Contract.
13. Failure to Execute Contract. If the successful bidder fails to execute the Contract within ten (10) business days after notice of such acceptance or if the bidder fails to furnish both performance and payment bonds, the obligation of the bid bond, if applicable, will remain in full force and effect and the money payable thereon shall be paid into the funds of the Owner as liquidated damages for such failure.
14. Surety and Insurance Companies. The contract provides that the surety and insurance companies must be acceptable to the Owner. Only those sureties listed in the Department of Treasury’s Listing of Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) are acceptable to the Owner. At the time of issuance, all insurance and bonds must be issued by a company licensed by the Georgia Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of insurance in the State of Georgia for the applicable line of insurance. Such company shall be an insurer with an A.M. Best Financial Strength Rating of “A-“ or better and with an A.M. Best Financial Size Category of Class V or larger.
15. Interpretations. No oral interpretations will be made to bidders as to the requirements of the Bidding Documents. Requests for interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be made in writing to the Design Professional and the Contracting Officer not later than six (6) business days prior to the date set for receipt of bids. All interpretations made to bidders will be issued in the form of addenda to the Bidding Documents and will be posted to the e-Builder web site. Such addenda are to be acknowledged at the appropriate location on the electronic Bid Form. No addenda will be issued within three (3) business days of the date set for receipt of bids without an extension of the bid date.
16. Trade Names.
a. No Restriction of Competition. When reference is made in the Bidding Documents to trade names, brand names, or to the names of manufacturers, such references are made solely to indicate that products of that description may be furnished and are not intended to restrict competitive bidding. If it is desired to use products of trade or brand names or of manufacturers’ names which are different from those mentioned in the Bidding Documents, application for the approval of the use of such products must reach the hands of the Design Professional and the Contracting Officer at least ten (10) business days prior to the date set for the opening of bids.
b. Request for Approval of Substitute Product. All requests for approval of substitution of a product
Section A - Bid Requirements: Instructions to Bidders SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
must be made to the Design Professional in writing. The request shall include a copy of the published recommendations of the manufacturer for the installation of the product together with a complete schedule of changes in the drawings and specifications, if any, that must be made in other work in order to permit the use and installation of the proposed product in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the product. The application must be accompanied by a schedule setting forth in which respects the materials or equipment submitted for consideration differ from the materials or equipment designated in the Bidding Documents. To be approved, a proposed product must also meet or exceed all express requirements of the Bidding Documents.
c. Issuance of Addenda. If the submittal is approved by the Design Professional, an addendum will be issued to all prospective bidders. The successful bidder may furnish no products of any trade names, brand names, or manufacturers’ names except those designated in the Bidding Documents or any addenda.
d. Conference with the Owner. Any party who alleges that rejection of a submittal is the result of bias, prejudice, caprice, or error on the part of the Design Professional may request a conference with a representative of the Owner, PROVIDED: That the request for said conference, submitted in writing, shall have reached the Owner at least five business days prior to the date set for the opening of bids, time being of the essence.
17. Sales Tax. Unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, the Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes, which are legally enacted at the time bids are received.
18. Examination of Site. In submitting a bid for the Project, the Contractor acknowledges that it has visited the Project Site and has taken into consideration all observed conditions that might affect its work.
19. Employment of Georgia Citizens and Use of Georgia Products. It is the desire of the Owner that materials and equipment manufactured or produced in Georgia shall be used in the work and that Georgia citizens shall be employed in the work at wages consistent with those being paid in the general area in which the work is to be performed. This desire on the part of the Owner is not intended to restrict or limit competitive bidding or to increase the cost of the work; nor shall the fulfillment of this desire be asserted by the Contractor as an excuse for any noncompliance or omission to fulfill any obligation under the contract.
20. Trading with the State, Ethics. In submitting a bid, the bidder certifies that the provisions of law contained in O. C. G. A. § 45-10-20 to 45-10-71 prohibiting officials and employees of the state from engaging in certain transactions with the state and state agencies, and the Governor’s Executive Orders governing ethics, have not and will not be violated in any respect in regard to this contract.
21. Minority Business Enterprises. It is the policy of the Owner that minority business enterprises shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the Owner purchasing process. Therefore, the Owner encourages all minority business enterprises to compete for, win, and receive contracts for goods, services and construction. Also, the State encourages all companies to sub-contract portions on any State contract to minority business enterprises. Any questions regarding statements contained hereunder should be directed to the State Small and Minority Business Coordinator.
Section A - Bid Requirements: Instructions to Bidders SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
22. Georgia Income Tax Incentive. Bidders interested in taking advantage of the Georgia income tax incentives provided for by the Official Code of Georgia Annotated 48-7-38 relative to the use of minority subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the State of Georgia should contact the State Small and Minority Business Coordinator at the following address:
Governor’s Small Business and Entrepreneurial Office Georgia Department of Economic Development 75 Fifth Street, NW, Suite 1200 Atlanta, Georgia 30308 Telephone: (404) 962-4000 Fax: (404) 962-4001
23. Reciprocal Preference Law. In accordance with O.C.G.A. §13-10-3, vendors resident in the State of Georgia will be granted the same preference over vendors resident in another State in the same manner, on the same basis, and to the same extent that preference is granted in awarding bids for the same goods or services by such other State to vendors resident therein over vendors resident in the State of Georgia. A Georgia resident business shall include any business that regularly maintains a place from which business is physically conducted in Georgia for at least one year prior to submitting this bid or a new business that is domiciled in Georgia which regularly maintains a place from which business is physically conducted in Georgia; provided, however, that a place of business shall not include a post office box, site trailer, or temporary structure.
24. Georgia Security and Immigration Compliance Act. The Contractor shall complete and submit the Contractor Affidavit under O.C.G.A 13-10-91 (b)(1) attached hereto (“E-Verify Affidavit”). Failure to submit this form with submission of a bid will result in the rejection of the bid.
Section A - Bid Requirements: Instructions to Bidders SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
SECTION A BID REQUIREMENTS: BID FORM (To be subscribed and sworn to before a notary public)
Under oath, the undersigned submits the following bid verification and statement of qualifications for consideration by the Owner:
Firm Name: LEGAL NAME OF BUSINESS (As registered with Secretary of State)
Address: LEGAL BUSINESS ADDRESS (P.O. BOX IS INSUFFICIENT)
CITY STATE ZIP
MAILING ADDRESS IF DIFFERENT FROM ABOVE
Telephone Number: Facsimile Number:
Contact Person Name: ______Contact’s Email Address:
Year Organized: Where Incorporated:
Is Firm a Georgia Resident: ☐YES ☐NO
Plan of Organization: ☐ Proprietorship ☐Corporation ☐Partnership ☐LLC
Federal I.D. No.: or Social Security No.:
The firms’ principals are as follows:
(1) Check One: President ( ) Partner ( ) Owner ( )
(2) Check One: Vice President ( ) Secretary ( ) Partner ( )
(If incorporated, the names of both the President and Corporate Secretary must be indicated. If a partnership, all partners must be indicated.)
Number of years engaged in the contracting business under the present firm name:
Georgia General Contractor: ☐YES ☐NO License Number(s):
Other State General Contractor Licenses, Trade or Specialty Licenses:
• Type:______License Number:______
Issuing State or Issuing Authority: ______
• Type:______License Number: ______
Section A - Bid Requirements: Bid Form SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
Issuing State or Issuing Authority: ______
Has the bidder refused to execute a contract upon award? ☐YES ☐NO
Has the bidder been declared in default on a contract? ☐YES ☐NO
Has the bidder ever been terminated for cause on a contract? ☐YES ☐NO
Has the bidder, its principals, or officers been convicted of building code violations, bribery, bid rigging, or any other felony involving moral turpitude? ☐YES ☐NO
Is the Bidder or its principals or officers currently debarred, suspended, or declared ineligible or otherwise excluded from contracting with the Federal government or any state agency? ☐YES ☐NO
Is the Bidder’s current Experience Modification Rate (EMR) 1.2 or less? ☐YES ☐NO
If answer is Yes to any statement above, please explain (attach additional sheets if necessary): ______
1. Bid Certification. Having carefully examined the Project Manual titled, Chapel HVAC Upgrades, Arrendale State Prison and Addendum No.(s) ______, as well as the Site and conditions affecting the Work, bidder hereby proposes to furnish all services, labor, materials, and equipment in accordance with the Bidding Documents, for the sum of: ______DOLLARS
($______) and to achieve Material Completion by not later than 100 consecutive calendar days from the date of the Proceed Order.
Alternates. Bidder proposes the following alternates that may be accepted and incorporated in the Contract as follows:
Add Alternate #01: Furnish and install new 2” rigid conduit from the chapel service entrance to the existing transformer shown on the plans.
ADD THE SUM OF ______DOLLARS
($______)
2. Bid Bond. Enclosed herewith is a bid bond in the amount of DOLLARS ($______) (being not less than 5% of the base bid) payable to Georgia Department of Corrections. The undersigned hereby agrees that this bid may not be revoked or withdrawn after the time set for the opening of bids, but shall remain open for acceptance for a period of 60 days following such time.
3. Certification of Proper Licenses. Contractor certifies that they have been granted and possess all necessary, valid, and current licenses to do business in the State of Georgia as issued by the
Section A - Bid Requirements: Bid Form SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
respective State Boards and Government Agencies responsible for regulating and licensing the services to be provided and performed pursuant to this Agreement.
4. Certification of No Fraud or Collusion. I certify that this bid is made without prior understanding, agreement, or connection with any corporation, firm or person submitting a bid for the same materials, supplies, or equipment, and is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud. I understand collusive bidding is a violation of State and Federal law and can result in fines, prison sentences and civil damage awards. I agree to abide by all conditions of this bid and certify that provisions of Georgia O.C.G.A. §45-10-20, et. sec., have not and shall not be violated in any respect.
Under oath I certify that I am a principal or other representative of the bidder and that I am authorized by it to execute this statement and verification on its behalf. I am personally knowledgeable and the foregoing statement of facts is true and correct.
BY: Authorized Signature (BLUE INK PLEASE)
Typed/Printed Name Title
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE
_____ DAY OF ______, 20___
______[NOTARY SEAL] Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
NOTICE TO BIDDERS 1) MAKE SURE YOU HAVE SIGNED THIS BID VERIFICATION AND STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS IN THE SPACE PROVIDED ABOVE. 2) MAKE SURE YOU AND YOUR SURETY HAVE PROPERLY EXECUTED THE BID BOND. 3) YOU MUST INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FORMS WHEN YOUR BID IS SUBMITTED:
BID FORM BID BOND CONTRACTOR AFFIDAVIT UNDER O.C.G.A 13-10-91 (E-VERIFY AFFIDAVIT) TAX COMPLIANCE FORM
Section A - Bid Requirements: Bid Form SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) PAPER BIDS
CONTRACTOR* AFFIDAVIT UNDER O.C.G.A. § 13-10-91(b)(1)
Project No. and Name: GDC-16-093-ARR-SP, Chapel HVAC Upgrades
Contractor*:
STATE OF GEORGIA COUNTY OF:
By executing this affidavit, the undersigned contractor verifies its compliance with O.C.G.A. §13-10-91, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm or corporation which is engaged in the physical performance of services on behalf of Georgia Department of Corrections has registered with, is authorized to use and used the federal work authorization program commonly known as E-Verify, or any subsequent replacement program, in accordance with the applicable provisions and deadlines established in O.C.G.A. §13-10-91. Furthermore, the undersigned contractor will continue to use the federal work authorization program throughout the contract period and the undersigned contractor will contract for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of such contract only with subcontractors who present an affidavit to the contractor with the information required by O.C.G.A. §13-10-91(b). Contractor hereby attests that its federal work authorization user identification number and date of authorization are as follows:
Federal Work Authorization User Identification Number
Date of Authorization
I hereby declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct.
Executed on , 20 in (City), (State).
______Signature of Authorized Officer or Agent of Contractor
______Printed Name and Title of Authorized Officer or Agent
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE
_____ DAY OF ______, 20__
______Notary Public My Commission Expires: ______
*For the purposes of this affidavit only, anyone under contract with the Owner (i.e. architects, engineers, consultants, etc) is deemed a “contractor.”
Section A - Bid Requirements: Tax Compliance Form SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
TAX COMPLIANCE
INSTRUCTIONS TO SUPPLIERS Please complete the following information: • Supplier’s Name: • Physical Location Address: • Federal Identification Number (FEI): • Have you ever been registered in the State of Georgia? • If so, please provide the following information, if applicable:
o State Taxpayer Identification Number (STI): o Sales and Use Tax Number: o Withholding Tax Number: • What type of service will you perform? • Will you sell any tangible personal property or goods? • Supplier’s Affiliate’s Name:
o FEI: o STI: o Sales and Use Tax Number: o Withholding Tax Number: If there is more than one affiliate, please attach a separate sheet listing the information above. • Person responsible for handling supplier’s tax issues (such as the CFO, the company tax officer, etc.): o Name: o Telephone Number: o E-mail Address:
NOTICE TO SUPPLIER: In the event the supplier is considered for contract award, the information provided in the form will be submitted by the State Entity to the Georgia Department of Revenue (“DOR”) for a determination as to whether the supplier is a “prohibited source” (as defined by O.C.G.A. §50-5-82) or whether there are any other outstanding tax issues. MISSING, INCOMPLETE, OR ERRONEOUS DATA MAY DELAY OR PROHIBIT VERIFICATION OF YOUR ELIGIBILITY FOR CONTRACT AWARD. NO PROHIBITED SOURCE MAY RECEIVE CONTRACT AWARD; THEREFORE, YOU ARE STRONGLY ENCOURAGED TO CHECK YOUR TAX STATUS NOW AND RESOLVE ANY OUTSTANDING TAX LIABILITIES AND/OR MISSING TAX RETURNS.
STATE ENTITY: Please submit this form via email to DOR at [email protected] for processing in accordance with the Georgia Procurement Manual.
Section A - Bid Requirements: Tax Compliance Form SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
SECTION B CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
THIS AGREEMENT is made the day of Month, Year by and between the Georgia Department of Corrections an agency of the State of Georgia, (hereinafter, called the “Owner”), with a place of business at 300 Patrol Road, Forsyth, Georgia 31029 and (Contractor Name), a corporation duly authorized by law to transact business in the State of Georgia (hereinafter, called the “Contractor”), whose mailing address is (Contractor Address).
W I T N E S S E T H:
WHEREAS, Owner has had prepared drawings, plans, specifications and addenda describing certain construction work it requires, the originals of which are on file and of record in the owner’s offices, and are, by this reference, specifically incorporated herein; and
WHEREAS, Contractor, having obtained an exact copy of said drawings, plans, specifications and addenda, has submitted the bid for such work that is the most beneficial to the State of Georgia.
NOW, THEREFORE, the Owner and the Contractor in consideration of the mutual promises and benefits flowing to the parties hereto as hereinafter stated, agree as follows:
1. SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment to perform all the Work shown on the drawings and called for in the specifications entitled Chapel HVAC Upgrades, as prepared by Wiley-Wilson, who is referred to in the Bidding Documents as the Design Professional. It is the intent and it is hereby agreed that the Contractor shall perform all work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. MATERIAL COMPLETION DATE. This Contract shall be commenced within ten (10) days after proceed order is issued by the Owner and Material Completion shall be achieved in 100 days from and including the date of the proceed order, time being of the essence.
3. CONTRACT SUM. The Owner shall pay the Contractor the sum of (Bid Amount - written and numeric) subject to adjustment by additive or deductive Change Orders.
4. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. The Owner shall make progress payments on account of the contract on or about the 15th day of each month as stated in Article 58 of the General Conditions.
5. FINAL PAYMENT. (a) Final payment under this Contract will be due to the Contractor thirty (30) days after the issuance of the Certificate of Material Completion by the Design Professional. The Contractor agrees that before applying for final payment, he will furnish to the Owner the Payment Affidavit, and the warranties and guarantees called for in the specifications.
(b) Upon receipt of written notice from the Contractor pursuant to Article 66 of the General Conditions that the work is ready for final inspection, the Design Professional shall promptly make such inspection, and when he finds the work complies with the contract and when the contract shall have been fully performed he shall promptly issue a Certificate of Material Completion, over his own signature, stating that the work provided for in this contract has been completed under the terms and conditions thereof, and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said final certificate, is due and payable.
(c) Before issuance of Certificate of Material Completion, the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Design Professional that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been paid.
Section B - Construction Contract – Page 1 of 3 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
(d) If full completion of the work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and the Design Professional so certifies, the Owner shall, upon certificate of the Design Professional, and without terminating the contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the work fully completed. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
6. THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents consist of the Project Manual, any Addenda, and any other documents listed below, and it is expressly understood that these documents are specifically made a part of this Contract.
PROJECT MANUAL: Entitled Chapel HVAC Upgrades, Arrendale State Prison Project No. GDC-16-093-ARR-SP Dated: January 30, 2017
Addendum: 7. NOTICES. All notices shall be given to the following addresses:
CONTRACTOR: {Insert Name of Firm} {Insert Mailing Address} {Insert City, State, Zip} Attention:
OWNER: Georgia Department of Corrections 300 Patrol Road Forsyth, Georgia 31029 Attention:
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL: Michael J. Hughes, Wiley/Wilson 5901 Peachtree Dunwoody Road Building C, Suite 515 Atlanta, Georgia 30328
8. ENERGY EFFICIENCY AND SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION ACT OF 2008. This project is is not subject to the Energy Efficiency and Sustainable Construction Act of 2008 (“Energy Act”). Projects subject to the Energy Act require commissioning, water-use reduction, and use of not less than 10% of Georgia products.
9. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. The agreed daily amount for Liquidated Damages is: $ 140.00 per day.
10. VENUE AND JURISDICTION. This Agreement and all rights, privileges and responsibilities shall be interpreted and construed according to the laws of the State of Georgia. Any lawsuit or other action based on claims arising from this Contract shall be brought in a court or the forum of competent jurisdiction in Fulton County, in the State of Georgia.
11. NO CONFLICTS OF INTEREST. The Contractor covenants that it presently has no interest and shall not acquire any interest, direct or indirect, which would conflict in any manner or degree with the performance required under this Agreement. The Contractor further covenants that in the performance of this Agreement, no person having any such interest shall be employed or contracted with.
12. PROHIBITED TRANSACTIONS. The parties hereto certify that the provisions of law contained in the Act prohibiting full-time appointive officials and employees of the State from engaging in certain transactions affecting the State as defined in §45-10-20 through 45-10-26 of the O.C.G.A. have not and will not be violated in any respect in regard to this Agreement.
Section B - Construction Contract – Page 2 of 3 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
13. NO ASSIGNMENT. This Agreement and the proceeds of this Agreement may not be assigned nor may the performance thereunder be assigned, except with the prior written consent of the Owner.
14. NO WAIVER. The failure of the Owner at any time to require performance by the Contractor of any provision hereof, shall in no way affect the right of the Owner thereafter to enforce any provision or any part of the Contract, nor shall the failure of the Owner to enforce any breach of any provision hereof to be taken or held to be a waiver of such provision, or as a waiver, modification or recession of the Contract itself.
15. NON-PROFIT CONTRACTORS. If the Contractor is a nonprofit Contractor as defined in §50-20-2 of the O.C.G.A., then the Contractor agrees to comply with the provision of said Act, and in particular requirements of Section 3 thereof, and with such further instructions and requirements as the State of Georgia may subsequently require in the implementation of said Act.
16. ILLEGAL IMMIGRATION REFORM AND ENFORCEMENT ACT OF 2011. Contractor certifies its compliance with Illegal Immigration Reform and Enforcement Act of 2011 and specifically those provisions codified at O.C.G.A. §13-10-90 et. seq. Contractor warrants that it has registered with and uses the federal work authorization program commonly known as “E-Verify.” Contractor further agrees that it will contract for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of this contract only with subcontractors who present an affidavit as required by O.C.G.A. §13-10-91. Contractor warrants that it will include a similar provision in all contracts entered into with subcontractors for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of this contract.
17. REQUIREMENT FOR WRITTEN AMENDMENT. No amendment to this Contract shall be effective unless it is in writing and signed by duly authorized representatives of the parties. No representation, request, instruction, directive or order, made or given by any official of any agency of the State of Georgia, whether verbal or written shall be effective to amend this contract or excuse or modify performance hereunder unless reduced to a formal amendment and executed as set forth above. Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation, delay in performance, or other benefit claimed for relying upon or responding to any such representation, request, instruction, directive, or order.
18. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Contract, including all documents incorporated herein, constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter; hereby superseding all other prior and contemporaneous agreements, representations, statements, negotiations, and undertakings whether oral or written.
THE PERSON SIGNING ON BEHALF OF EACH PARTY REPRESENTS THAT SUCH PERSON IS DULY AUTHORIZED AND FULLY EMPOWERED TO ENTER INTO THIS CONTRACT ON BEHALF OF SUCH PARTY. EACH PARTY WARRANTS THAT SUCH PARTY HAS FULL POWER AND AUTHORITY TO ENTER INTO AND PERFORM THIS CONTRACT. THE PARTIES HERETO ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THEY HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS CONTRACT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS CONTRACT, AS INDICATED BY THE SIGNATURES OF THEIR DULY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES SET OUT BELOW.
EXECUTED AS OF THE DAY AND YEAR FIRST WRITTEN ABOVE Georgia Department of Corrections (Insert Name of Contractor)
Printed Name: Printed Name:
Title: Title:
By: By: (Signature) (Signature)
Section B - Construction Contract – Page 3 of 3 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
SECTION C GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. Conflicts. In the event of conflict in the Contract Documents, the Supplementary General Conditions control over the Contract and the General Conditions. The Contract controls over the General Conditions. The Design Professional has no authority to amend the General Conditions, orally or in writing, either expressly or by implication.
2. Legal Compliance. The Contractor shall comply with all laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, and orders of any government agency having jurisdiction in the performance of the work and shall ensure the compliance of his subcontractors. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the following laws are specifically referenced:
a) The Drug-Free Workplace Act, O.C.G.A. § 50-24-1, et. seq. b) Preference for Georgia Supplies, materials, equipment, and agricultural products, O.C.G.A. §§ 50-5-60 through 61. c) Preference for Georgia forest products, O.C.G.A. § 50-5-63. d) Preference to local sellers of Georgia products, O.C.G.A. § 50-5-62. e) Standards and Requirements for Construction, Alterations, etc., O.C.G.A. § 8-2-1 et. seq. f) Control of Soil Erosion and Sedimentation, O.C.G.A. § 12-7-1, et. seq. g) Regulation of Fire and other Hazards, O.C.G.A. § 25-2-1 et. seq. h) Regulation of Blasting Operations, O.C.G.A. § 25-2-1 et. seq. and § 25-9-1 et. seq. i) Providing Safe workplace, O.C.G.A. § 34-2-10 and § 34-7-20. j) Georgia Facility Protection Act, (Underground Gas Pipe Law), O.C.G.A. § 25-9-1 et. seq. k) High Voltage Safety Act, O.C.G.A. § 46-3-30 et. seq. l) Access and Use by Physically Handicapped Persons, O.C.G.A. § 30-3-1 et. seq. m) Small and Minority Business Enterprises, O.C.G.A. § 50-5-120 et. seq. and § 50-5-130 et. seq. n) Trading with the State or State Officials, O.C.G.A. §§ 45-10-20 to 45-10-71. o) Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, 42 U. S. C. § 200a through 2000h-6. p) Age Discrimination in Employment Act, 29 U. S. C. § 621 et. seq.; 42 U. S. C. § 6101 et. seq. q) Americans with Disabilities Act, 42 U. S. C. § 12101 et. seq. r) Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act, 29 U. S. C. § 651 et. seq. s) Federal Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act, 42 U. S. C. § 11001 et. seq. t) Georgia Open Records Act, O.C.G.A. § 50-18-70 et. seq. u) Georgia Blasting Standards Act, O.C.G.A. § 25-8-1 et.seq. and Blasting, Excavating Nearby Underground Gas Pipes and Utilities, § 25-9-1 et. seq. v) Scaffolding and Staging Statute, O.C.G.A. § 34-1-1 et.seq. w) Department of Labor Rules and Regulations, O.C.G.A. § 34-2-6 et. seq. x) Hazardous Chemical Protection and Right to Know Act, O.C.G.A. § 45-22-2 et. seq. y) Retainage on Public Works Contracts, O.C.G.A. § 13-10-80 et. seq. z) Compliance with “federal work authorization programs” and federal Immigration Reform and control Act of 1986 by Georgia Public Employers, contractors and subcontractors, O.C.G.A. § 13-10-90 et. seq.
3. Third Party Beneficiaries. Contractor acknowledges, stipulates and agrees that the Owner is a public department, agency, authority, or commission of the executive branch of the government of the State of Georgia performing an essential public and governmental function by means of the Contract. Failure of Contractor to comply with this Contract may cause general and special or consequential damages to the Owner or to officers, agencies, commissions, departments, instrumentalities or other entities of the State of Georgia, which will occupy the completed work or which provide governmental services or supplies to them. By way of illustration and not limitation, breach or repudiation of the Contract may cause the need to crowd other premises, to extend occupancies of other premises or to occupy unsatisfactory premises. Contractor shall be liable for damages under this Contract not only to Owner but also to, and as third party beneficiaries of
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 1 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
its Contract, the State of Georgia, or to any officer, agency, commission, department, instrumentality or entity of the State of Georgia, which is to occupy the work or which performs a governmental function for the same and whose costs or burden is increased by a breach in the Contract. This Contract contemplates general and special or consequential damages not only to Owner but to such third party beneficiaries (“State beneficiaries”). Liability to third party beneficiaries shall be without regard to whether Owner has breached any duty of its own to third party beneficiaries, and neither Contractor nor its surety shall have any right of subrogation against Owner or the State or other third party beneficiaries.
4. Liquidated Damages. Time being of the essence of this contract, and a material consideration thereof, it is mutually agreed by the parties hereto in case of the Contractor’s failure to complete the construction within the time specified, the Owner will be damaged thereby. The Contractor shall commence performance of its activities on the site under this Contract as specified by the date of the Proceed Order. The Contractor shall complete construction not later than the Material Completion Date shown in the Contract, except as adjusted by change order. The Owner and Contractor hereby agree that the amount of such damages shall be the daily rate specified in the contract, beginning upon the contractually required Material Completion Date and ending on the date that the certificate of material completion is issued. The parties agree that the specified Liquidated Damages are not established as a penalty but are calculated and agreed upon in advance as a fair and equitable amount reasonably estimated in advance to cover losses to be incurred by the Owner for such delay or interruption.
5. Immigration Reform Compliance. Contractor certifies its compliance with Illegal Immigration Reform and Enforcement Act of 2011 and specifically those provisions codified at O.C.G.A. §13- 10-90 et. seq. Contractor warrants that it has registered with and uses the federal work authorization program commonly known as “E-Verify.” Contractor further agrees that it will contract for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of this contract only with subcontractors who present an affidavit as required by O.C.G.A. §13-10-91. Contractor warrants that it will include a similar provision in all contracts entered into with subcontractors for the physical performance of services in satisfaction of this contract
6. Definitions
a. Applicable Law. This contract shall be governed by the law of Georgia.
b. Article Not Plenary. This article is not entire, plenary, or exhaustive of all terms used in the General Conditions which require definition. There are definitions of other terms under articles to which the terms are related.
c. Certificate for Material Completion – The notice from the Design Professional to the Owner certifying Contractor’s achievement of Material Completion and providing for the Owner’s authorization to take possession of the Project.
d. Change Order Form. The change order form is the instrument by which adjustments in the contract sum are effected.
e. Contract. The written document that is the evidence of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor.
f. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents include the executed Contract, the Project Manual, Addenda and fully executed Change Orders.
g. Contractor. The person or entity who executes the Contract and thereby assumes responsibility for the proper completion of the activities described in the Contract Documents.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 2 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
h. Cross-reference and Citations of Articles and Paragraphs of the General Conditions. Cross- references and citations of articles and paragraphs of the General Conditions are for the convenience of the Contractor, Design Professional and the Owner and are not intended to be plenary or exhaustive nor are they to be considered in interpreting the Contract Documents or any part of the Contract Documents.
i. Days. All references to a number of days shall mean calendar days unless otherwise noted.
j. Design Professional. The architect or engineer or architectural or engineering firm selected by the Owner (i) for the design and preparation of Contract Documents governing the construction of a Project, or (ii) for construction contract administration under the Contract Documents, or (iii) for both, all such services and the scope thereof to be set forth in the Design Professional Contract. The Design Professional is not an employee of the Owner but is engaged or retained by it for the purpose of performing design and/or construction administration services for the project. The term “Design Professional” includes architects, engineers, surveyors, designers, and other consultants retained by the Design Professional. In the absence of a Project Design Professional, specifically retained by the Owner to perform design services for this project, the term Design Professional appearing in these documents shall mean Owner or Owner’s Representative.
k. Grounds for Issuance of Notice of Declaration of Default. It shall be a sufficient ground for the issuance of a notice of declaration of default that the Contractor has been unfaithful or delinquent in the performance of the contract or any part of it in any respect. Without limitation of the foregoing and without subtracting from any right or defense of the Owner under other provisions of the Contract Documents, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that it is ipso facto ground for issuance of a notice of declaration of default under the performance bond if the Contractor shall have neglected or failed for any reason to remedy a breach of a notice of non-compliant work within thirty (30) days after the Owner shall have given written notice of said breach to the Contractor and the surety on the performance bond with written demand of the Owner for curing of the delinquency. The Design Professional does not have authority to declare the Contractor in default.
l. Install, Deliver, Furnish, Supply, Provide and Other Such Words. Such words mean the work in question shall be put in place by the Contractor ready for use unless expressly provided to the contrary.
m. Meaning of Words and Phrases. Unless the context or the Contract Documents taken as a whole indicate to the contrary, words used in the Contract Documents that have usual and common meanings shall be given their usual and common meanings and words having technical or trade meanings shall be given their customary meaning in the subject business, trade or profession.
n. Notice of Non-Compliant Work. A notice of non-compliant work shall be in writing, shall be dated, shall be signed by the Design Professional, shall be addressed to the Contractor with a copy to the Owner, and shall contain three elements as follows:
FIRST ELEMENT: Description of work:
1. which has been omitted; or 2. which is unexecuted as of the date of the notice of non-compliant work, the time for its incorporation into the work under the construction progress schedule having expired; or 3. which has not been executed in accordance with the methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents.
SECOND ELEMENT: Citation of the provision or provisions of the Contract Documents that has or have been violated.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 3 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
THIRD ELEMENT: Fixing of a reasonable space of time within which the Contractor shall have made good the deficiency which said space of time shall not be deemed to be an extension of contract time for filing the Notice of Readiness for Final Inspection nor shall it be deemed to be authorization for amendment to the construction progress schedule.
A notice of non-compliant work may be issued for failure of the Contractor to supply enough workmen or enough materials or proper materials.
o. Notices. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
p. Owner. The State of Georgia, by and through a State Agency, identified as such in the Contract with whom the Contractor has entered into the contract and for whom the work is to be completed.
q. Parties. The Owner, the Contractor and the Design Professional are those mentioned as such in the contract. They are treated throughout the Contract Documents as if each were of the singular number and masculine gender.
r. Proceed Order. The proceed order is a written notice from the Owner pursuant to which the Contractor shall commence physical work on the site. A proceed order is a condition precedent to the execution of any work on the site by the Contractor.
s. Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are drawings, schedules, data, catalogue cuts, manufacturers’ published recommendations, charts, bulletins, brochures, illustrations, circulars, roughing drawings or formulae distributed by contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers, materialmen, or suppliers for use in installing work.
t. Specifications. The term “Specifications” shall include all written matter in the bound Project Manual or on the drawings and any addenda or modifications thereto.
u. Subcontractor. The term subcontractor as employed herein includes only those having direct contract with the Contractor. It includes one who furnishes materials worked to a special design according to the plans and specifications of this work but does not include one who merely furnished materials not so worked.
v. Supplier. A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, supplier, or vendor of goods or equipment in connection with the Work, or any other party having a Contract or Purchase Order with the Contractor or with a subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor or a subcontractor.
w. Time Limits. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents or shown on the construction progress schedule are of the essence of the contract.
x. Work. The term “work” of the Contractor or subcontractor includes labor or materials or both.
y. Work Order. A work order is a written notice from the Owner issued separately to the Contractor for each subcontractor. A work order is a condition precedent to the execution of any work on the site by a subcontractor.
7. Forms and Specimens. - The forms and specimens attached as exhibits are incorporated by reference herein and shall be executed in substantial conformance for proper completion of the Contract.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 4 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
8. Pre-construction Meeting. After award of contract a Pre-construction meeting shall be held between the Owner, the Contractor and the Design Professional to review the project and set up the approximate work sequence schedule. Within ten (10) days after this meeting, Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional for approval five (5) typed copies of the work sequence schedule, showing proposed dates of beginning, completion milestones, and completing work through issuance of the Design Professional’s Certificate of Material Completion. The Contractor shall submit the project safety plan to the Design Professional for review a minimum of five (5) days prior to the Pre-construction conference. Notwithstanding this review, Contractor retains full, complete and total responsibility for all job related safety.
9. Copies of Notices to Owner. Wherever the General Conditions provide that a copy of any notice, request, or demand filed with the Design Professional by the Contractor shall be furnished to the Owner, such notice, request or demand shall not become effective until the Owner’s copy shall have been received by the Owner. No notice in writing or orally to the Design Professional or to the Owner’s Representative is notice to the Owner unless copy of the aforesaid notice in writing shall have been properly served upon the Owner at the address shown in the Contract.
10. Contractor’s Warranty as to Performance. The Contractor warrants that he is familiar with the codes applicable to the work and that he has the skill, knowledge, competence, organization, and plant to execute the work promptly and efficiently in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor, having the obligation to keep a competent superintendent on the work during its progress, to employ only skilled mechanics, and to enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees, the Contractor, himself, is responsible for seeing that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor warrants to the Owner that all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.
11. Mutual Responsibility of Contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any separate Contractor on the work the Contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such Contractor by agreement if he will so settle. If such separate Contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner shall arise therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and pay all costs incurred by the Owner.
12. Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Design Professional all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents for approval. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
13. Safety Program. Five (5) days prior to the preconstruction meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner a specific safety program for the Work. The Contractor shall establish and require all subcontractors to establish reasonable safety programs. No imposition of responsibility on the Contractor for safety under this Contract shall relieve any subcontractor of its responsibility for safety of persons or property on or near the Project Site. The Contractor shall include in his plan the name(s) of the person(s) in charge of Safety.
14. Samples. The Contractor shall furnish for approval all samples as directed. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples.
15. Materials, Appliances, and Employees
a. Payment for. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 5 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
b. Quality of Materials and Workmanship. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of the quality required by the specifications. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and work. The burden of proof is on the Contractor.
c. Quality and Discipline of Employees. The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him.
16. Design Professional
a. Supervision. The Design Professional shall have general supervision and direction of the work except in respect to safety as stated under Article 13 and except as further qualified by the General Conditions. He is the agent of the Owner only when in special instances he is authorized in writing by the Owner so to act, and in such instances he shall, upon request, show the Contractor written authority. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract.
b. Interpreter and Impartial Judge. As the Design Professional is, in the first instance, the interpreter of the conditions of the contract and the judge of its performance, he shall side neither with the Owner nor with the Contractor but shall use his powers under the contract to enforce its faithful performance by both.
17. Design Professional’s Decisions
a. Promptness. The Design Professional shall make decisions with reasonable promptness after presentation of evidence on (l) any claim of the Owner or Contractor, (2) a demand of the Owner or Contractor for a decision on any matter relating to the execution or progress of the work, or (3) a demand of the Contractor or Owner for interpretation of or additional instructions with respect to the Contract Documents.
b. On Artistic Effect. The Design Professional’s decisions in matters relating to artistic effect shall be final if within the terms of the Contract Documents.
18. Testing Services. Laboratories for testing services shall be selected by, engaged by, and responsible to the Design Professional. This article does not apply to verification of design mix on concrete.
19. Inspection of Existing Facilities Prior to Commencing Work
a. The Contractor shall give a notice in writing to the Design Professional, prior to commencing work for the purpose of arranging for a joint inspection by (a) the Design Professional, (b) the Contractor and (c) the authorized representative of the Owner, during the course of which inspection the three parties to the joint inspection shall prepare a schedule identifying and showing the location of any damage to the existing work which is ascertainable by inspection. The schedule shall be prepared in four counterpart originals each of which shall be dated and signed on behalf of each part to the joint inspection. An executed and dated counterpart original shall be filed with: (a) the Design Professional, (b) the Contractor and (c) the authorized representative of the Owner.
b. It is agreed that the preparation of the schedule is for the benefit of the Contractor and is intended to enable him to have the protection afforded by a record of such existing damage as is visually ascertainable. The Contractor shall have no responsibility to repair any damage
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 6 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
that shall appear on the above-mentioned schedule nor shall he be responsible for repairing any existing damage which was not ascertainable by visual inspection or which was not the result of negligence on his part. Subsequently to the signing of the above-mentioned schedule the Contractor shall be responsible for repairing any damage except as noted.
20. Protection of Work and Property
a. Duty to Protect Property. The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect all other property from damage, injury, or loss arising in connection with the work regardless of who may be the Owner of said property. He shall make good any such damage, injury, or loss except such as may be directly the result of errors in the Contract Documents or such as shall be caused directly by agents or employees of the Owner.
b. Safety Precautions. The Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of OSHA and/or the Department of Labor (O.C.G.A. §34-2-6), and, where not inconsistent with the foregoing, the “Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction” issued by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc., for safety and prevention of accidents, and shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work arising out of and in the course of employment on work under the contract. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of his plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage that may result from their improper construction, maintenance, or operations. He shall erect and properly maintain at all times as required by the conditions and progress of the work proper safeguards for the protection of workmen and the public and shall post danger warnings against any hazards created by the construction operations. He shall designate a responsible member of his organization on the work whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. In the absence of notice to the contrary, filed with the Design Professional in writing with copy to the Owner, this person shall be the superintendent of the Contractor.
c. Emergencies. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Design Professional or Owner, shall act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Any remuneration claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined in accordance with allowances permitted on force account under Article 49 (c) of the General Conditions.
d. Fire Prevention.
1. Contractor shall take adequate and reasonable precautions to protect work against damage by fire and smoke. For example, without limitation, Contractor shall:
a. Provide fire extinguishers in readily accessible locations.
b. Periodically inspect fire extinguishers, remove discharged extinguishers immediately and replace with new or recharged extinguishers.
c. Keep one fire extinguisher within five (5) feet of any welding or open flame operations.
d. Remove oil-soaked and paint-soaked materials, including paper and rags, from building(s) daily, and more frequently as necessary, to eliminate danger of fire.
e. Not permit workmen to smoke inside building(s) or during operations involving combustible adhesives, solvents, mastics, or other fire hazard materials.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 7 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
e. Rain Water, Surface Water, and Back-up. The Contractor shall protect all work, including but not limited to excavations and trenches, from rain water, surface water, and back-up of drains and sewers. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, pumps, shoring, enclosures, and equipment necessary to protect and to keep the work free of water.
f. Dust Control. Dust-proof enclosures or partitions for protection wherever dusty or dirty work is performed and dampening of debris to avoid dusting when removed shall be provided and included as a cost of the work.
21. Notices. Any notice, demand, consent, approval, change order, or other material communication required or permitted to be given under this Contract shall be in writing and signed by an officer or duly authorized representative of the Contractor, and shall be addressed as shown in paragraph 7 of the Contract. Prior to any shut-down of any system (electrical, mechanical, etc.), Contractor shall supply not less than five (5) working days’ notice to the Design Professional with a copy to the Owner. No shutdown of any system shall occur until the Contractor has received permission from the Owner in writing.
22. Working Hours. The Contractor shall perform all work, make all deliveries and have access to work areas between 7:30 A.M. and 5:00 P.M. Monday through Friday and, upon written permission of the Owner, may make deliveries and have access to work areas at any hour of any day, but shall bear without any contribution from the Owner, any extra expense and responsibility for doing so, including, without limitation, its own overtime expense. Contractor’s promise to perform the work under the contract within the maximum time stated is not dependent on the availability of the working area for hours other than identified hereinabove.
23. Building Occupancy
a. Contractor recognizes and agrees that portions of the building(s) are occupied by State employees performing essential tasks necessary to the efficient operation of State government. Consequently, Contractor agrees that he shall perform his work in such a manner as to provide the least possible disruption to the occupants of the building. Accordingly, the Contractor agrees to the following stipulations, but without limitation:
1. The Contractor and its personnel shall not use the passenger elevators for transportation of equipment, supplies, goods and material unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner.
2. The Contractor shall provide temporary portable toilets at a location designated by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the toilet or toilets in a clean, sanitary condition. The Contractor’s employees will not have access to the permanent toilet facilities in the building unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner.
3. The Owner will not provide parking space for the Contractor or Contractor’s employees, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner, except for vehicles which are loading or unloading goods, equipment, supplies and materials in the loading area. Contractor shall not block any loading dock area or permit its employees to park in this area.
4. No project or advertising signs of any description will be allowed. Contractor shall provide directional and warning signs at protective barricades to assure safe passage of pedestrians in and near areas of work.
5. The Contractor shall generally be prohibited from entering areas of the building(s) except where work is in progress. Work and access shall cause as little disruption to building occupants as possible. The Contractor shall give a minimum of five (5)
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 8 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
working days advance notice and shall receive permission from the Owner for building access other than during normal business hours.
6. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper attire and actions of all workmen at all times. Any improper attire or action by any person is cause for immediate dismissal of the offending person from the site and project.
7. Contractor shall remove an employee (or any person working on behalf of the Contractor) upon notice that such person does not meet the requirements of the Contract or upon notice the Owner does not want such person (with or without cause) working on the Owner’s premises.
24. Indoor Air Quality. The building(s) will be in use and occupied during construction. Contractor shall schedule work and provide temporary ventilation and/or isolation to insure that fumes from welding, other construction tasks, and out-gassing from construction materials do not migrate to occupied areas.
25. Hazardous Material. A Hazardous Material is any substance or material identified as of the date of the Agreement as hazardous under any governmental law, rule, or regulation, or otherwise subject to governmental requirements concerning handling, disposal, and/or cleanup. Except for hazardous materials specifically identified to be remediated by the Contract Documents or Change Order, the Contractor shall not be required to perform any work related to hazardous materials encountered at the Site. The Contractor is fully responsible for any Hazardous Materials brought on the Site by any party, other than the Owner, who has a contractual relationship with the Contractor to perform Work under the Contract Documents. If the Contractor knows of the presence of hazardous materials in any form existing on or delivered to the Site, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Design Professional and the Owner as to the quantity and nature of the hazardous material.
26. Utilities. Except for the cost of connection, the Owner shall furnish without cost to the Contractor all water and electricity as presently available at the site required to do the work. The Contractor shall make connection to utilities at locations agreeable to the Owner. The Contractor shall pay all costs for connections and extending these to the area where it proposes to use them.
27. Royalties and Patents. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof.
28. Surveys, Permits and Regulations
a. General. The Owner shall furnish all surveys unless otherwise specified. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, licenses and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be obtained and paid for by the Owner unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work. If the Contractor observes that the drawings or specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owner in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules or regulations without such notice to the Owner, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
b. Codes
1) International Building Code, with Georgia State Amendments 2) International Mechanical Code, with Georgia State Amendments
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 9 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
3) International Fuel Gas Code, with Georgia State Amendments 4) International Plumbing Code, with Georgia State Amendments 5) International Electrical Code, with Georgia State Amendments 6) International Energy Conservation Code, with Georgia State Amendments
The latest edition of the above listed codes with all amendments as of the date of the opening of bids shall govern the installation of all work and is adopted and incorporated into the Contract Documents and made a part thereof by reference, Provided, however: That the drawings and specifications shall be adhered to in all cases where they call for quality of materials, quality of workmanship, or quality of construction which is equal to or in excess of the quality required by the above stated codes and Provided also: That there may be no variances from the drawings and specifications except to the extent that the said variances shall be necessary in order to comply with the above stated codes. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to familiarize himself with the requirements of the above stated codes. If there are any express requirements in the drawings or specifications which are at variance to the above stated codes, all changes in the work necessary to eliminate the said requirements and make the work conform to the above stated codes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work.
29. Assignment. The Contractor shall not assign the contract or sublet it as a whole nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder. Contractors may subcontract portions of the Work, normally performed by subcontractors.
30. Separate Contracts. The Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Project with its own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar conditions of the Contract. The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall properly regulate, schedule, connect, and coordinate his work with theirs.
31. Use of Premises. The Contractor shall confine his plant, his apparatus, the staging and storage of materials, the operations of his forces, and the work to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, or the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with his materials. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the work to be loaded with weight that will endanger its safety. The Contractor shall enforce the Design Professional’s instructions regarding signs, advertisements, fires and smoking.
32. Bonds.
a. Performance Bond and Payment Bond. The Contractor shall furnish both a performance bond and a payment bond and said bonds shall be provided on the forms as set forth in the Exhibits.
b. Required Qualifications for Surety. The Contract provides that the surety and insurance companies must be acceptable to the Owner. Only those sureties listed in the Department of Treasury’s Listing of Approved Sureties (Department Circular 570) are acceptable to the Owner. All bonds at the time of issuance must be issued by a company authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of suretyship in the State of Georgia, and shall have a Best Policyholders Rating of “A-“ or better and with a financial size rating of Class V or larger.
c. Penal Amount of Bonds, State Law. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, pursuant to O.C.G.A. §§13-10-2, 13-10-20, 13-10-40 and 13-10-60, the performance bond and the payment bond must be in a penal amount equal to at least 100% of the Contract Sum. Accordingly, the Contractor warrants and agrees that, for any Change Order increasing the
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 10 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
Contract Sum by five percent or more or when the total cost of the work has increased by five percent or more, it shall obtain a written amendment to the payment bond and the performance bond increasing the penal amounts of both bonds to 100% of the Contract Sum, effective as of the date of the Change Order.
33. Indemnification, Insurance and Hazards
a. Responsibility. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner from the time of the signing the agreement or from the beginning of the first work, whichever shall be earlier, for all injury or damage of any kind resulting from any negligent act or omission or breach, failure or other default regarding the work by the Contractor, or any of its subcontractors, its agents, employees or others working at the direction of the Contractor or on its behalf, regardless of who may be the owner of the property.
b. Indemnification Agreement. Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the State of Georgia and its departments, agencies and instrumentalities and all of their respective officers, members, employees and directors (hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Indemnitees”) from and against any and all claims, demands, liabilities, losses, costs or expenses, including attorneys’ fees, due to liability to a third party or parties, for any loss due to bodily injury (including death), personal injury, and property damage arising out of or resulting from the performance of this contract or any act or omission on the part of the Contractor, its agents, employees or others working at the direction of Contractor or on its behalf, or due to any breach of this contract by the Contractor, or due to the application or violation of any pertinent Federal, State or local law, rule or regulation. This indemnification extends to the successors and assigns of the Contractor. This indemnification obligation survives the termination of the contract and the dissolution or, to the extent allowed by law, the bankruptcy of the Contractor. If and to the extent such damage or loss (including costs and expenses) as covered by this indemnification is paid by the State Tort Claims Trust Fund, the State Authority Liability Trust Fund, the State Employee Broad Form Liability Fund, the State Insurance and Hazard Reserve Fund, and other self-insured funds (all such funds hereinafter collectively referred to as the “Funds”) established and maintained by the State of Georgia Department of Administrative Services Risk Management Division (hereinafter “DOAS”) the Contractor agrees to reimburse the Funds for such monies paid out by the Funds.
1. This indemnification applies where the Indemnitees are partially responsible for the situation giving rise to the claim, provided however, that this indemnification does not apply to the extent of the sole negligence of the Indemnitees. 2. This indemnification does not extend beyond the scope of this contract and the work undertaken thereunder. Nor does this indemnification extend to claims for loses or injuries or damages incurred directly by the Indemnitees due to breach or default by the Indemnitees under the terms and conditions of this contract.
3. DOAS, Risk Management will endeavor to notify affected insurers of claims made against the State which fall within this indemnity. In the event of litigation, the Attorney General will endeavor to keep the Contractor and its general liability insurer as named on the insurance certificate informed regarding the claims and settlement.
c. Insurance Requirements
1. Insurance Certificates. The Contractor shall, prior to the commencement of work, procure the insurance coverages identified below at the Contractor’s own expense and shall furnish the Owner an insurance certificate listing the Owner as the certificate holder. The insurance certificate must provide the following:
a) Name and address of authorized agent
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 11 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
b) Name and address of insured c) Name of insurance company(ies) d) Description of policies e) Policy Number(s) f) Policy Period(s) g) Limits of liability h) Name and address of Owner as certificate holder i) Project Name and Number j) Signature of authorized agent k) Telephone number of authorized agent l) Mandatory thirty day notice of cancellation / non-renewal m) Evidence of Insurance Coverages shall be provided on a form acceptable to the Owner
2. Policy Provisions. Each of the insurance coverages required below (i) shall be issued by a company licensed by the Insurance Commissioner to transact the business of insurance in the State of Georgia for the applicable line of insurance, and (ii) shall be an insurer (or, for qualified self-insureds or group self-insureds, a specific excess insurer providing statutory limits) with a Best Policyholders Rating of “A-” or better and with a financial size rating of Class V or larger. Each such policy shall contain the following provisions:
a) The insurance company agrees that the policy shall not be canceled, changed, allowed to lapse or allowed to expire until thirty (30) days after the Owner has received written notice thereof as evidenced by return receipt of registered letter or until such time as other insurance coverage providing protection equal to protection called for in this contract shall have been received, accepted and acknowledged by the Owner. Such notice shall be valid only as to the project as shall have been designated by Project Number and Name in said notice.
b) The policy shall not be subject to invalidation as to any insured by reason of any act or omission of another insured or any of its officers, employees, agents or other representatives (“Separation of Insureds”).
c) Each Insurer is hereby notified that the statutory requirement that the Attorney General of Georgia shall represent and defend the Indemnities remains in full force and effect and is not waived by issuance of any policy of insurance. In the event of litigation, any settlement on behalf of the indemnities must be expressly approved by the Attorney General. The Contractor and its insurance carrier may retain, but are not obligated to retain, counsel to assist with the defense of the Indemnitees, in which case there will be mutual cooperation between the Attorney general and such counsel.
d) The maximum deductible, except for worker’s compensation qualified self-insurers or group self-insurers, in any policy shall not exceed $100,000.00.
3. Insurance Coverages. The Contractor also agrees to purchase and have the authorized agent state on the insurance certificate that the following types of insurance coverages, not inconsistent with the policies and requirements of O.C.G.A. § 50-21-37, have been purchased by the Contractor. The minimum required coverages and liability limits are as follows:
a) Workers’ Compensation Insurance. The Contractor agrees to provide Workers’ Compensation coverage in accordance with the statutory limits as established by the General Assembly of the State of Georgia. A group insurer must submit a certificate of authority from the Insurance Commissioner approving the group
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 12 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
insurance plan. A self-insurer must submit a certificate from the Georgia Board of Worker’s Compensation stating the Contractor qualifies to pay its own worker’s compensation claims. The Contractor shall require all subcontractors performing work under this contract to obtain an insurance certificate showing proof of Workers’ Compensation Coverage and shall submit a certificate on the letterhead of the Contractor in the following language prior to the commencement of work:
“This is to certify that all subcontractors performing work on this project are covered by their own workers’ compensation insurance or are covered by the Contractor’s worker’s compensation insurance.”
b) Employers’ Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall also maintain Employer’s Liability Insurance Coverage with limits of at least:
i. Bodily Injury by Accident – $1,000,000 each accident; and ii. Bodily Injury by Disease – $1,000,000 each employee.
The Contractor shall require all subcontractors performing work under this contract to obtain an insurance certificate showing proof of Employers Liability Insurance Coverage and shall submit a certificate on the letterhead of the Contractor in the following language prior to the commencement of work:
“This is to certify that all subcontractors performing work on this project are covered by their own Employers Liability Insurance Coverage or are covered by the Contractor’s Employers Liability Insurance Coverage.”
c) Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide Commercial General Liability Insurance (2004 ISO Occurrence Form or equivalent) which shall include, but need not be limited to, coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from premises and operations liability, products and completed operations liability, blasting and explosion, collapse of structures, underground damage, personal injury liability and contractual liability. The Commercial General Liability Insurance shall provide at minimum the following limits:
Coverage Limit 1. Premises and Operations $1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 2. Products and Completed Operations $1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 3. Personal Injury $1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 4. Contractual $1,000,000.00 per Occurrence 5. General Aggregate $2,000,000.00 per Project
Additional Requirements for Commercial General Liability Insurance:
i. The policy shall include an additional insured endorsement naming the officers, members, and employees of the Owner and the State of Georgia as additional Insureds.
ii. The coverage extended to the additional insureds for any claims not covered by the Georgia Tort Claims Act shall be no broader than the coverage extended to the Contractor and is not expanded to cover claims and losses that are not insurable under the Contractor’s policy.
iii. The policy or policies must be on an “occurrence” basis.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 13 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
iv. The policy must include separate aggregate limits per project.
d) Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance which shall include coverage for bodily injury and property damage arising from the operation of any owned, non-owned or hired automobile. The Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance Policy shall provide not less than $1,000,000 Combined Single Limits for each occurrence.
Additional Requirements for Commercial Business Automobile Liability Insurance:
i. The policy shall name as additional Insureds the officers, members, and employees of the Owner and the State of Georgia.
ii. The coverage extended to the additional insureds for any claims not covered by the Georgia Tort Claims Act shall be no broader than the coverage extended to the Contractor and is not expanded to cover claims and losses that are not insurable under the Contractor’s policy.
e) Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide a Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance to provide excess coverage above the Commercial General Liability, Commercial Business Automobile Liability and the Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability to satisfy the minimum limits set forth herein. The minimum amount of Umbrella limits required above the coverages and minimum limits stated in Articles 33.c.3 (a), (b), (c) and (d) shall be:
Minimum Combined Primary Liability and Excess Umbrella Limits of: $3,000,000 per Occurrence $4,000,000 Aggregate
Additional Requirements for Commercial Umbrella Liability Insurance:
i. The policy shall name as additional Insureds the officers, members, and employees of the Owner and the State of Georgia.
ii. The coverage extended to the additional insureds for any claims not covered by the Georgia Tort Claims Act shall be no broader than the coverage extended to the Contractor and is not expanded to cover claims and losses that are not insurable under the Contractor’s policy.
iii. The policy must be on an “occurrence” basis.
f) Builders Risk Insurance. Contractor shall provide a Builder’s Risk Policy to be made payable to the Owner and Contractor, as their interests may appear. The policy amount should be equal to 100% of the contract sum, written on an all risk basis or its equivalent. All deductibles shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and in no event shall the amount of any deductible exceed $10,000.00. The policy shall be indorsed as follows:
“The following may occur without diminishing, changing, altering or otherwise affecting the coverage and protection afforded the insured under this policy:”
i. Furniture and equipment may be delivered to the insured premises and installed in place ready for use; and
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 14 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
ii. Partial or complete occupancy by Owner; and
iii. Performance of work in connection with construction operations insured by the Owner, by agents or lessees or other contractors of the Owner, or by contractors of the lessee of the Owner.
In the event that the contract is for renovation, addition or modification of an existing structure and Builders Risk Insurance is not available, the Owner will accept an Installation Floater Insurance Policy with the above endorsements in lieu of the Builders’ Risk Insurance Policy. Such floater must insure loss to materials and equipment prior to acceptance by Owner and must be on an ALL RISK BASIS with the policy written on a specific job site.
g) Disposition of Insurance Documents. Prior to commencing work, one certificate of insurance with all endorsements attached must be deposited with Owner for each insurance policy required.
4. Termination of Obligation to Insure. Unless otherwise expressly provided to the contrary, the obligation to insure as provided herein shall not terminate until the Design Professional shall have executed the Certificate of Material Completion.
5. Failure of Insurers. The Contractor is responsible for any delay resulting from the failure of his insurance carriers to furnish proof of proper coverage in the prescribed form.
34. Identification, Correlation, and Intent of Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents consist of the Contract between the Owner and Contractor with these General Conditions, Supplementary and other Conditions, the Drawings, the Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to the execution of this Agreement, and all Modifications issued by the Owner after execution of the Contract such as Change Orders, and written interpretations. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is necessary to produce the intended results.
35. Complete, Definite, and Clear Instructions and Schedules of Drawings.
a. Refinement of Documents. The Contractor shall do no work without complete, definite, and clear drawings and specifications. In the event the Contract Documents are not complete, definite, and clear the Contractor shall make demand upon the Design Professional in writing for additional instructions and shall furnish the Owner a copy of the aforesaid demand. With reasonable promptness the Design Professional shall furnish complete, definite, and clear instructions in writing, or by means of drawings, or in writing and by means of drawings. Such additional instructions, if given orally, shall be confirmed in writing or by drawings or both within a reasonable space of time. Any such additional instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, true developments thereof, and reasonably inferable therefrom. The work shall be executed in conformity with the aforesaid instructions. The Design Professional shall furnish the Owner a copy of all additional instructions issued to the Contractor.
b. Schedules. The Contractor and the Design Professional shall jointly prepare a schedule, subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the work, fixing the dates at which the various detail drawings will be required, and the Contractor shall furnish them in accordance with that schedule.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 15 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
36. Contract Documents at the Site. The Contractor shall keep at the site one copy of the Contract Documents in good order with all addenda and change orders noted thereon and available to the Owner, Design Professional and their representative(s).
37. Ownership of Drawings and Models. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the Design Professional are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work, and with the exception of one set, are to be returned to the Design Professional on his request at the completion of the work. All models are the property of the Owner.
38. Specification Arrangement. The specifications are separated into numbered and titled divisions for convenience of reference. Neither the Owner nor the Design Professional assumes any responsibility for defining the limits of any subcontracts on account of the arrangement of the specifications. Notwithstanding the appearance of such language in the various divisions of the specifications as, “The Plumbing Contractor”, “The Electrical Contractor”, “The Roofing Contractor”, etc., the Contractor is responsible to the Owner for the entire contract and the execution of all of the work referred to in the Contract Documents.
39. Conflicts. The following principles shall govern the settlement of disputes which may arise over conflicts in the Contract Documents: (a) as between figures given on drawings and the scaled measurements, the figures shall govern; (b) as between large-scale drawings and small-scale drawings, the larger scale shall govern; (c) as between drawings and specifications, the requirements of the specifications shall govern; and (d) as between the contract and the specifications, the requirements of the contract shall govern. Conflicts noted shall be reported to the Design Professional.
40. Effect of Addenda, Bulletins, and Change Orders. No special implication, interpretation, construction, connotation, denotation, import, or meaning shall be assigned to any provision of the Contract Documents because of changes created by the issuance of any (1) addendum, (2) bulletin, or (3) change order other than the precise meaning that the contact documents would have had if the provision thus created had read originally as it reads subsequently to the (1) addendum, (2) bulletin, or (3) change order by which it was created.
41. Manufacturer’s Recommendations. In the event the contract shall require that given work or materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or requirements, the Contractor shall obtain for his use at the site in executing the work copies of the bulletin, circular, catalogue, or other publication of the manufacturer bearing the title, number, edition, date, etc., designated in the contract.
42. Superintendence and Supervision by Contractor
a. Superintendent of Contractor. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress and until the Certificate of Material Completion has been executed by the Design Professional a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Design Professional. The superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Design Professional unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
b. Replacement of Superintendent. If the Contractor terminates the Project Superintendent or, if the Contractor, for any reason, engages a Project Superintendent different from the one originally assigned to the Project, the Contractor must ensure that the replacement Project Superintendent has similar qualifications and experience as the originally identified Project Superintendent. Furthermore, the Contractor must obtain the Owner’s prior written approval before engaging a permanent replacement Project Superintendent.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 16 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
c. Supervision by Contractor. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention and he shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract.
43. Commencement, Prosecution and Completion. The Contractor will be required (a) to commence work under this contract within ten days after date of written notice from the Owner to proceed, (b) to prosecute the work with faithfulness and energy (c) to install the various parts of the work with equal steps shown on the construction progress schedule and at the same rate shown on the construction progress schedule to be furnished pursuant to Article 48 and (d) to complete the work within the time stipulated in the bid form as adjusted by any extensions of time provided. Commencement of work shall mean actual physical work on the site. In the event the Contractor shall be delinquent in respect to compliance with the time limits established in the construction progress schedule, he shall, within seven days after receipt of written demand of the Owner, commence working not less than a twelve hour day and no less than six days a week until such time as he shall have brought the amount of work in place into compliance with the construction progress schedule. Fulfillment of this requirement as to overtime work (hereinafter referred to as “recovery of lost time required of the Contractor for his breach of covenant as to time”) shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for breach of the covenant as to time. For account of recovery of lost time required of the Contractor for his breach of covenant as to time the Contractor shall be entitled to no claim against the Owner for any payment, injury or damages.
44. Measurements and Dimensions. Before ordering material or doing work which is dependent upon coordination with building conditions, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, elevations, grades, and pitch by taking measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No consideration will be given to any claim based on differences between the actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Any discrepancies between the drawings and/or the specifications and the existing conditions shall be referred to the Design Professional for additional instructions before any work affected thereby is given.
45. Cutting, Patching and Fitting. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit.
46. Space Conditions. All pipes passing through floors, walls, and ceilings shall be installed with sufficient space between them to permit installation of pipe insulation and floor, wall, and ceiling plates without cutting of insulation or plates. The Contractor shall locate all equipment that must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions.
47. Cleaning Up. The Contractor shall at all time keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At the end of each working day, Contractor shall leave the premises in a broom clean condition and remove all trash and debris. The Contractor shall provide such mats, drop cloths, etc., as shall be necessary to protect the surrounding areas from soil or damage. Any damage to existing work shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with Article 20 of the General Conditions. At the completion of the work he shall remove all his rubbish from and about the building(s) and all his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave his work “broom-clean” or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified. In case of dispute the Owner may remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the Contractor as the Design Professional shall determine to be just.
48. Progress Reports. Within such reasonable space of time as the Owner shall designate in writing, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs, construction progress schedules, payrolls, bills, vouchers, correct copies of all subcontracts, statements, reports, correct copies of all agreements, correspondence, and written transactions with the surety on the performance bond which have any relevance to the work, estimates, records, and other data as the Owner may request concerning work performed or to be
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 17 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
performed under this contract. When requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall give the Owner access to accounts relating to the foregoing. The above reports shall include but are not limited to (a) written notice of dates by which specified work will have been completed, (b) written notice of dates by which non-compliant work shall have been made good, (c) written notice that non-compliant work has been made good, (d) written notice as to the date or dates by which work which has not been performed with equal steps and at the same rate required by the construction progress schedule shall have been brought into conformity with the construction progress schedule, (e) date by which any undisputed claim of a subcontractor, Supplier, or laborer shall have been paid, (f) written advice regarding the nature and amount of any disputed claim of a subcontractor, Supplier, or laborer, and (g) information regarding work performed upon demand of the Owner pursuant to a Change Order. Prior to submitting the first periodical estimate, the Contractor shall have furnished to the Owner and the Design Professional a construction progress schedule (based on work in place only) in accordance with the style and format of a specimen to be furnished by the Owner.
49. Changes in the Work
a. Owner’s Right to Make Changes. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work consisting of additions, deletions, or modifications, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. The Contractor hereby expressly agrees that the Contractor shall have no right to a claim for damages or extended overhead because of changes made by the Owner. Such work is hereinafter designated “change” or “changes.” All such changes shall be performed under the conditions of the original contract except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of signing of the change order form. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized only by written Change Order signed by the Owner. (A sample change order form is provided in Section D, Attachment #2).
b. The change order form shall be accompanied by a breakdown in the form prescribed in a specimen which the Owner will supply to any bidder upon request. The Design Professional shall certify to the amount of the adjustment. The change order form shall be signed by the Contractor and the Owner. The breakdown is only for the purpose of enabling the Design Professional and the Owner to make a judgment on the dollar amount of the adjustment in the contract sum. In the event any condition, term, qualification, limitation, exception, exemption, modification, or proviso shall appear in a breakdown it shall be invalid unless expressly recited in the change order form under Paragraph 3, “Description of Change.”
c. Cost to Owner for Change. The cost or credit to the Owner from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways:
Case 1. By estimate and acceptance of a lump sum. Case 2. By Unit Prices named in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon. Unit Prices are NET and include all compensation due the Contractor. Case 3. By force account, which is defined as expenditures allowed under this Article plus a percentage of percentages as stated hereinafter. [see paragraph (e) below]
d. Changes Forbidden without Consent of Owner. Neither the Design Professional nor the Contractor shall make any change whatsoever in the work without authorization or order of the Owner in writing except in emergency. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by written Change Order.
e. Existing Conditions. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site and familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed. The Owner does not undertake to represent or warrant site or local conditions.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 18 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
f. Cost to Owner, Allowances for Contractor and Allowable Expenditures. In cases (1) and (3) above, the “allowance for overhead and profit” combined, included in the total cost to the Owner, shall be based upon the following schedule:
1. For the Contractor an allowance for work which he performs with his own forces, not to exceed 20% of his “net additional allowable expenditures”, if any, for changes. 2. For a subcontractor an allowance for work which he performs with his own forces, not to exceed 20% of his “net additional allowable expenditures”, if any, for changes. A subcontractor shall receive no allowance for overhead and profit on work not performed by his own forces. 3. For the Contractor an allowance for work performed by his subcontractors, not to exceed 7 1/2% of the amount, if any, due the subcontractor for changes.
The above percentages shall be applied to the “net allowable expenditures” if any, as limited and defined herein. If the net difference between “allowable expenditures” and savings results in a decrease in expenditures, the amount of credit allowed the Owner shall be the net decrease without and credit for profit and overhead. “Net additional allowable expenditures” as used herein shall mean the difference between all “allowable expenditures” and savings. The term “allowable expenditures” is limited to and defined as items of labor or materials, the use of heavy construction equipment and all such items of cost as insurance premiums, social security and old age and unemployment insurance, and (in cases where there is an extension of time) pro rata expenditures for time of foreman employed in the direct superintendence of productive labor in execution of changes. All expenditures not included in the term “allowable expenditures” as limited and defined in this article shall be considered as overhead, including but not limited to insurance other than that which is mentioned in this article, bond premiums, supervision, travel (meals, transportation and lodging), superintendence (except pro rata time of foremen as referred to herein), timekeepers, clerks, watchmen, hand tools, small tools, incidental job burdens and office expense. Any other provisions in the Contract Documents to the contrary notwithstanding, only demonstrable, direct, out-of-pocket expenditures for the changes plus percentages as set forth hereinabove shall be allowable for changes. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, upon request, any and all necessary information the Owner may require in order to verify any and all costs associated with “Changes in the Work.”
g. Breakdown of Expenditures, Cases (1) and (3). To accompany all change orders, the Contractor shall furnish a breakdown of expenditures for labor and materials by units and quantities in the form prescribed by the Owner, and the breakdown shall be accompanied by the following declaration.
“I do solemnly swear to the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, that the costs shown hereinabove do not exceed current costs for like services or materials in the locality of the Project and, in the case of a Force Account, the costs represented do not exceed the actual costs to the Contractor; and that the quantities shown do not exceed actual requirements.”
For all force account changes the Contractor shall promptly and in no event later than thirty (30) days after receipt of written demand therefore pursuant submit to the Design Professional a complete, accurate, and final breakdown and account together with vouchers, showing all expenditures and percentages allowable under Case (3). For all unit price changes the Contractor shall promptly and in no event later than thirty (30) days after receipt of written demand therefore submit to the Design Professional an accurate account of the quantity of work performed under Case (2). In any case, the Design Professional shall certify to the amount [including under Case (1) and Case (3) the allowance prescribed in the contract for overhead and profit] due the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain and furnish as backup to the Contractor’s breakdown a separate breakdown for each subcontractor’s
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 19 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
charges prepared by each subcontractor on the letterhead of the subcontractor and properly signed by the subcontractor.
h. Time of Submission of Claims [“Statement of Claim”]. Budgeting and cash flow being of material importance to the Owner, no claim of the Contractor on account of any change or on account of any alleged negligence of the Design Professional or Owner whether said claim shall be accrued or prospective, shall be valid unless a “statement of claim” in full accompanied by vouchers and other supporting data shall have been filed with the Owner by the Contractor not later than thirty (30) days after receipt of written request thereof by the Contractor from the Owner, time being of the essence. The “statement of claim” shall contain a concise and clear recital of the ground or grounds on the basis of which the claim is asserted, including a designation of the provision or provisions of the contract documents on which the claim is based. The statement of claim shall indicate the dollar amount of the claim.
50. Claims
a. Extra Cost. If the Contractor maintains that any instructions by drawings or otherwise involve extra cost to the Owner under this Contract, he shall give the Owner and the Design Professional written notice thereof within a reasonable time after the receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute any change except in emergency endangering life or property. The allowances to the Contractor shall then be as provided under Article 49. No claim for extra cost shall be valid unless so made.
b. Damages. If either party to this Contract should suffer damage in any manner because of any wrongful act of neglect of the other party or of anyone employed by the other party, then he shall be reimbursed by the other party for such damage. No claim of the Contractor for damages shall be valid unless written notice thereof shall have been received by the Owner by registered mail within fifteen (15) days after occurrence of the event on which the claim is based. The “statement of claim” shall contain a concise and clear recital of the ground or grounds on the basis of which the claim is asserted, including a designation of the provision or provisions of the Contract Documents on which the claim is based. The statement of claim shall indicate the dollar amount of the claim.
c. Protests. All reference to arbitration is deleted from the Contract Documents. Decisions of the Design Professional shall be rendered in all cases where provided for under the General Conditions of the Contract, but no decision of the Design Professional shall deprive the Owner or the Contractor of any form of redress which may be available under the laws of the State of Georgia to contracting parties. Any decision of the Design Professional shall be final and binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor shall have given written notice of protest to the Owner by registered mail within ten days of the receipt of the decision.
51. Delays and Extensions of Time
a. Grounds. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, or any causes beyond the Contractor’s control, then the contract time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Design Professional may determine. The Contractor expressly agrees that the Contractor’s sole remedy for such delay shall be an extension of contract time and that the Contractor shall make no demand for damages or extended overhead.
b. Filing of Claim. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than ten (10) days before claim thereof is made in writing to the Design Professional with copy to the Owner. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary, but no claim for a continuing delay shall be valid unless the Contractor, within ten days from the cessation of
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 20 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
the delay, shall have given notice in writing to the Design Professional, with copy to the Owner, as to the amount of additional time claimed.
c. Delay in Furnishing Drawings. If no schedule or agreement stating the dates upon which drawings or approval of shop drawings shall be furnished is made, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure of the Design Professional to furnish drawings or approval of shop drawings until two weeks after demand thereof and not then unless such claim be reasonable.
e. No Damages for Delay. In the event of any delay, not the fault of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time for completion only, and shall not be entitled to any additional payment on account of such delay. Without limiting the foregoing, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment or compensation of any kind from the Owner for direct, indirect or impact damages, including but not limited to costs of acceleration arising because of hindrance or delay from any cause whatsoever, whether such hindrances or delays be reasonable or unreasonable, foreseeable or unforeseeable, or avoidable or unavoidable; provided, however, that this provision shall not preclude recovery by the Contractor of damages for hindrances or delays due solely to fraud or bad faith on the part of the Owner or his agents.
52. Inspection of Work
a. Access to Work. The Design Professional and his representatives shall at all times have access to the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection.
b. Notice to Design Professional from Contractor Prior to Covering Work. If the specifications, the Design Professional’s instructions (either in the specifications or issued later in writing), laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Design Professional timely notice in writing of its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by any authority other than the Design Professional, of the date fixed for such inspection. Inspections by the Design Professional shall be made promptly and where practicable at the source of supply. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Design Professional, it must, if required by the Design Professional, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor’s expense.
c. Re-examination or Re-testing of Work Covered pursuant to Consent of Design Professional. Re-examination or re-testing of questioned work covered pursuant to consent of the Design Professional may be ordered by the Design Professional, and if so ordered the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract Documents the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement or of re-testing. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and in that event the Owner shall pay such cost. Re-examination or re-testing under the terms of this Article applies only to work which has been covered with consent of the Design Professional. Work covered without consent of the Design Professional must be uncovered for examination.
d. Inspection Does Not Relieve Contractor. Under the Contract Documents the Contractor has assumed the responsibility of furnishing all services, labor and materials for the entire work in accordance with such documents. No provisions of this article nor any inspection of the work by the Owner, representatives of the Owner, the Using Agency, Contract Compliance Specialist (if applicable), engineers employed by the Design Professional, representatives of the Design Professional, or the Design Professional shall in any way diminish, relieve, or alter said responsibility and undertaking of the Contractor; nor shall the omission of any of the foregoing to discover or to bring to the attention of the Contractor the existence of any work
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 21 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
or materials injured or done not in accordance with said Contract Documents in any way diminish, relieve, or alter such obligation of the Contractor nor shall the aforesaid omission diminish or alter the rights or remedies of the Owner as set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contract Compliance Specialist owes no duty to the Contractor.
e. False Start. In the event notice of readiness pursuant to Article 52(b), above, shall have been issued prematurely by the Contractor, his action shall be deemed to be a “false start”, and the Contractor shall be liable for the damage resulting from the aforesaid false start, including but not limited to the salary, professional fees, and travel and living expenses of the person or parties inconvenienced by the aforesaid false start.
53. Correction of Work
a. The Contractor shall promptly correct any Work rejected by the Design Professional as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, and shall correct any Work found to be defective or nonconforming within a period of one year from the Date of Completion of the Contract or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Article apply to Work done by subcontractors as well as to Work done by direct employees of the Contractor.
b. Remedy of the Owner for Breach of Notice of Non-Compliant Work. If the Contractor does not make good a deficiency within a reasonable space of time fixed in a notice of non- compliant work, the Owner may:
1. Remove the non-compliant work and store it at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expenses of such removal and storing within ten days after receipt of written demand of the Owner, the Owner may upon three days’ notice in writing to the Contractor, sell such materials at private sale or at auction and shall account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all proper costs incurred by the Owner; and 2. Supply omitted work, perform unexecuted work, replace and re-execute work not done in accordance with the methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents and deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, Provided: That the Design Professional shall approve the amount charged to the Contractor.
c. The remedies stated in this article are in addition to the remedies otherwise available to the Owner, do not exclude such other remedies, and are without prejudice to any other remedies. Time limits stated in notices of non-compliant work are of the essence of the contract.
54. Deductions for Uncorrected Work. If the Design Professional and Owner deem it inexpedient to correct work injured or done not in accordance with the contract, an equitable deduction from the contract price shall be made therefore; but there is no duty on the part of the Owner to accept any work injured or done not in accordance with the methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents, nor does the Contractor have the right to demand that there shall be acceptance of work injured or done not in accordance with the methods and materials designated in the Contract Documents.
55. Fire Marshal Inspections.
a. General. The State Fire Marshal may make inspections at any time. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to request inspections at 80% completion and for 100% inspection and Certificate of Occupancy. Requests shall be in writing with a copy to the Owner and Engineer. (Confirm lead time for inspection.)
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 22 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
b. Jurisdiction. The facilities are under the jurisdiction of State Official Code of Georgia annotated 25-2-13 (O.C.G.A.)
c. Inspections Defined: The basic definitions for 80% and 100% inspections are as follows:
1. 80% Field Review–The structural components are in place and open for review of the fire safety components. NOTE: Structural components include the following: fire walls, vertical shafts, stairways, smoke stops, hazardous area separation, roof and ceiling assemblies, corridor and door width, and HVAC system.
2. 100% Completion–The building(s) is/are ready to occupy and qualifies for a Certificate of Occupancy.
d. Certificate of Occupancy. The Contractor’s obligation under the Contract is to install the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, obtain the Certificate of Occupancy from the State Fire Marshal or his deputy, and forward it to the Design Professional as a part of the final close out procedures. The Design Professional’s obligation is to design the Work to comply with the applicable codes and to qualify for a Certificate of Occupancy.
56. Subcontractors, Materialmen, Suppliers and Employees
a. Subcontractor. A subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site.
b. Submission of List. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall furnish to the Owner in writing the names of subcontractors for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Contractor shall not employ any subcontractor to whom the Owner may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom he has a reasonable objection. The contract requires each subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the subcontractor, (1) to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor, all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner, and (2) allow to the subcontractor the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress afforded to the Contractor by these Contract Documents.
c. Warranty of Contractor. The Contractor warrants that the subcontractors selected by him are reputable, skilled, reliable, competent, qualified in the trade or field in which they are to perform on the project, and thoroughly familiar with applicable codes.
d. Certification On Account Of. The Design Professional shall, on request furnish to any subcontractor, wherever practicable, evidence of the amounts certified on his account.
e. Contractor Responsible for Acts and Omissions of Subcontractors, Materialmen, Suppliers and Employees. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers, and employees and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.
f. No Contract Between Owner and Any Subcontractor, Materialmen, Supplier or Employee. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner and any subcontractor or between the Owner and any materialmen, supplier, or employee of the Contractor or his subcontractors.
57. Relationship of Contractor and Subcontractors
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 23 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
a. Obligations of Each. The Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor and every subcontractor agrees to be bound by the terms of the contract documents insofar as they are applicable to his work.
b. Owner Not Obligated to Any Subcontractor. There is no obligation on the part of the Owner to pay to or to see to the payment of any sums to any (1) subcontractor, (2) supplier, (3) laborer, (4) employee, or (5) claimant as defined in the payment bond. [
c. Incorporation of Terms in Subcontracts. The Contractor agrees that failure on his part to incorporate in all subcontracts an express provision in accordance with Article 57(a) above, shall be deemed to be and is a breach of an essential covenant.
58. Application for Payments
a. Periodical Estimates and Receipts. The Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional in accordance with a form to be supplied by the Owner, an application [sometimes herein designated “periodical estimate”] for each payment, and, if requested by the Owner or Design Professional, receipts or other vouchers, showing his payments for materials and labor, including payments to subcontractors as requested.
b. Initial Breakdown and Periodical Payments. If payments are made on valuation of work done, such application shall be submitted at least ten days before each payment falls due, and the Contractor shall, before the first application, submit to the Design Professional a schedule of values of the various parts of the work, including quantities, aggregating the total sum of the contract, on a form to be furnished by the Owner with a complete breakdown of the contract price so arranged and so itemized as to meet the approval of the Design Professional and, if requested, supported by such evidence as to its correctness as the Design Professional may direct. The schedule designated herein the “initial breakdown”, when approved by the Design Professional shall be used as a basis for certificates of payment, unless it is found to be in error. In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this schedule on a periodical estimate form to be supplied by the Owner, and, if requested by the Design Professional or Owner, itemized in such form and supported by such evidence as the Design Professional or Owner may direct showing the Contractor’s right to the payment claimed on the periodical estimate.
c. Materials Storage.
i. If payments are made on account of materials delivered and suitably stored at the site but not incorporated in the work, they shall, if required by the Owner or the Design Professional, be conditional upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedure as will establish the Owner’s title to such material or otherwise adequately protect the Owner’s interest. The Contractor is responsible for the existence, protection, and, if necessary, replacement of materials until execution of the Certificate of Material Completion of the Design Professional. The Owner shall not pay for any materials stored off site.
ii. Should the Owner provide limited storage space in the work area, Contractor assumes full, complete and non-delegable responsibility for the security of the equipment so stored and for determining that the material stored in this area will not overload the floor system. Any damage to the structure as a result of the Contractor overloading the floor shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
d. Progress Payments, Retainage and Conversion to Lump Sum.
i. The Owner shall make progress payments on account of the contract as follows: On or about the 15th day of each month 90 per cent of the value, based on the contract prices, of labor
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 24 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
and materials incorporated in the work and of materials suitably stored at the site thereof up to the 1st day of that month, as estimated by the Design Professional, less the aggregate of previous payments, until one-half of the contract sum is due.
ii. At any time after one-half of the contract sum, including change orders, becomes due and the work is: (1) on or ahead of the construction progress schedule; (2) there are no breaches of notices of non-compliant work; (3) there is no delinquency in the filing of the final breakdown and accounting, together with vouchers, on force account work as referred to in Article 49 of the General Conditions; and (4) there are no unsatisfactory performance evaluations, if the Contractor requests and the Owner and Design Professional approve, the sum being withheld as retainage will be converted to a lump sum and held by the Owner until final completion.
iii. No further retainage will be withheld by the Owner from payments to the Contractor unless the following deficiencies occur: (1) the percentage of work complete falls behind the percentage required by the construction progress schedule by as much as 15 per cent, or; (2) the Contractor fails to cure a notice of non-compliant work or; (3) there are [further or additional] unsatisfactory performance evaluations, or; (4) the Contractor becomes delinquent in regard to the filing of the final breakdown and accounting, together with vouchers, on force account work as referred to in Article 49 of the General Conditions. In such event or events the Owner shall reinstate the 10 per cent retainage on all periodical estimates due to be paid while one or more of the events continues to exist. The Contractor will be given written notice of the reinstatement of the retainage.
iv. If the Contractor (1) recovers all lost time and puts the work back on schedule; and (2) remedies all breaches of notices of non-compliant work; and (3) corrects the deficiencies which caused the unsatisfactory performance evaluations, and (4) supplies a proper breakdown and accounting on force account work, then the sums withheld while either or all of the events existed will be converted to an additional lump sum and held by the Owner until final completion, and no further retainage will be withheld unless any of the deficiencies recur, in which event or events the Owner shall reinstate the 10 per cent retainage on all subsequent periodical estimates.
v. At the discretion of the Owner, the retainage of each subcontractor may be released separately as he completes his work. An application for release of a subcontractor's retainage shall bear the original certificate of the subcontractor, the Contractor, and the Design Professional that the subcontractor's work has been fully performed and that the sum for which payment is requested is due by the Contractor to the subcontractor. Checks releasing a subcontractor's retainage shall be made payable to the Contractor, the Contractor's surety, and the subcontractor and shall be mailed to the Contractor's surety. This article does not create any contractual relationship between the Owner and the subcontractor or any duty of the Owner to any subcontractor. All warranties shall run from the date of the Certificate of Material Completion of the Design Professional unless otherwise expressly provided in the contract. Payments pursuant to this article shall in no way diminish, change, alter or affect the rights of the Owner under the Contract Documents.
59. Certificate of Payments
a. Issuance. If the Contractor has made application for payment, the Design Professional shall not later than the date when each payment falls due issue to the Contractor a certificate for such amount as he decides to be properly due or state in writing his reasons for withholding a certificate.
b. Effect. No certificate issued, nor payment made to the Contractor, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the work by the Owner, shall be an acceptance of any work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The making of the final payment shall constitute a
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 25 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
waiver of all claims by the Owner other than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work appearing after final payment, or from requirements of the specifications or drawings. Acceptance of the final payment shall operate as and shall be a release to the Owner from all claims of any kind or character under the contract except for such specific amount or amounts as may have been withheld to cover the fair value of any incomplete work which has been certified by the Design Professional as incomplete through no fault on the part of the Contractor.
c. Date and Rate of Payment. Progress payments will be made by the Owner to the Contractor in accordance with Article 58 above. Final payment will be made in accordance with Article 5 of the Contract. The date and rate of payment are subject to Article 60. Sums retained pursuant to the present article are and remain the property of the Owner until such time as the Contractor shall have become entitled to receive payment of such retainage by (a) furnishing the remainder of the quid pro quo under the contract and (b) complying in full with the terms of the contract.
60. Payments Withheld. The Design Professional may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or a part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of:
a. Defective work not remedied. b. Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. c. Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractor or for materials or labor. d. A reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid. e. Damage to another contractor or to some third party. f. Failure to maintain a rate of progress in accordance with the construction progress schedule. g. Failure to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials.
When the above grounds are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. At the option of the Owner adherence to the construction progress schedule shall be a condition precedent to the right of the to demand payment of a periodical estimate. No omission on the part of the Owner to exercise the aforesaid option shall be construed to be a waiver of breach of the construction progress schedule or acquiescence therein, and the Owner may exercise its option from time to time and as often as may be expedient.
61. Liens. Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor, if required, shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all liens or claims arising out of this contract, or receipts in full in place thereof and, if required in either case, an affidavit that so far as he has knowledge or information the releases and receipts include all labor and materials for which a lien or claim could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor or claimant refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any lien or claim. If any lien or claim remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien or claim, including all costs and a reasonable attorney’s fee.
62. The Owner’s Right to Do Work. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this contract, the Owner, after three days’ written notice to the Contractor may without prejudice to any other remedy he may have (including without limitation remedies against the Contractor’s surety), make good the deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Design Professional shall approve the amount charged to the Contractor.
63. Defective Work. If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order, may order the
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 26 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity.
64. Owner’s Right to Terminate Contract.
a. Termination for Cause. If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with Contract Documents or fails to perform any provisions of the Contract, the Owner may, after seven (7) days written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor or, at its option that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may terminate the Contract and take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever method it may deem expedient, and if the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the expense of finishing the Work, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor, but if such expense exceeds such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
b. Termination for Convenience. The Owner may at any time, and for any reason or without any reason or cause, terminate this Contract by written notice to the Contractor specifying the termination date, without cause and irrespective of whether or not Contractor is in default of any of its obligations hereunder. The effective date of termination shall not be earlier than seven days from the date of confirmed receipt of the written notice. If the Owner terminates the Contract the Contractor shall: (i) stop the Services or the Work (as applicable); (ii) place no further orders or Subcontracts for materials, labor, services or equipment; and (iii) terminate all material and equipment orders and Subcontracts to the extent terminable (unless otherwise directed by Owner in writing) and advise Owner of all materials, equipment and other items which cannot be canceled or which are already delivered and allow Owner to participate in the salvage or disposition thereof. Contractor shall, as soon as practical after receiving notice of termination, submit to Owner an Application for Payment for all services performed through the date of receipt of the notice of termination, for which payment has not been previously made pursuant to the terms of this Contract.
65. Contractor’s Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract. If the Owner fails to make payment for a period of fifteen (15) days after receipt of proper pay request, the Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days written notice to the Owner, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed.
66. Notice of Readiness for Final Inspection. When the Contractor is ready for a final inspection, he shall give notice to the Design Professional and a copy to the Owner in the following words:
“The work on the contract for the [show name of improvement or project as it appears in the contract] having been fully completed except as stipulated herein below, it is requested that a final inspection be made promptly by the Design Professional in accordance with Article 5 of the contract. The following work is incomplete through no fault of the Contractor [list any work which the Contractor regards as a proper exception under Subparagraph (d) of Article 5 of the contract] “
No final inspection shall be made until such time as the Design Professional has received a letter in the exact form indicated above and a copy thereof has been received by the Owner. In the event the Contractor shall have issued the “Notice of Readiness for Final Inspection” prematurely [hereinafter referred to as “false start”] he shall be liable for the damage resulting from the aforesaid false start including but not limited to the salaries, professional fees, and travel and living expenses of the persons or parties inconvenienced by the aforesaid false start. The
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 27 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
Contractor agrees that he may not defend or excuse any deviation from the Contract Documents on the ground (a) that the deviation was not brought to his attention by another person or party or other persons or parties or (b) that a subcontractor is or subcontractors are at fault.
67. Operation and Maintenance Data and Instructions. Prior to Material Completion, the Contractor shall furnish, in three ring binders, advance copies of proper written instructions to the Owner concerning operation and maintenance of all mechanical, electrical and other operating systems and equipment. The Contractor shall provide training in the operation and maintenance of all mechanical, electrical and other operating systems and equipment in the presence of the Design Professional and the Owner and shall give notice in writing to the Design Professional and Owner at least fifteen days prior to the date on which it proposes for the training.
68. Keys. Keys with tags attached indicating number and/or description of door or room each key is intended to fit attached to each key shall be delivered to the Owner. Contractor shall prepare and furnish with the keys an itemized key schedule in quintuplicate listing the door or room number and/or description, serial number of key, and number of keys being delivered for each door or lock.
69. Marked-up Construction Documents. Prior to demand for payment of retainage, the Contractor shall provide a complete set of Marked-up Construction Documents to the Design Professional, which set shall reflect all changes caused by addenda, field changes, Change Orders, or observed changes by the Contractor or subcontractor(s) for the purpose of the Design Professional’s issuance of Record Documents to the Owner.
70. Affidavits. Before receiving any portion of the retainage, the Contractor will be required to furnish a Payment Affidavit in the form shown in Section C, Exhibits.
71. Material Completion. Material Completion is when the Work or designated portion thereof is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy and utilize the Work for its intended use. All final documents (certificates, warranties, guarantees, manuals, instructions, documents required by the Contract Documents) as required are due at Material Completion. Material Completion shall also require complete operation of all applicable building systems included in the Work, including but not limited to, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, telecom, data, security, elevators, life safety and accessibility. The Work shall be complete except for Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work.
a. Minor Item Defined. A Minor Item is a portion or element of the Work:
i. that can be totally complete within thirty (30) days; and
ii. that can be completed while the Owner occupies the Work without impeding or interfering with either the Owner’s use and occupation of the Work or the Contractor’s ability to complete the Minor Item; and
iii. that will not interfere with the complete use and enjoyment of the project by the Owner.
b. Permitted Incomplete Work Defined. Permitted Incomplete Work is work that is incomplete through no fault of the Contractor, as determined by the Owner, including, but not limited to, HVAC seasonal test and balance, seasonal landscaping or maintenance, incomplete work due to failure of separate contractors to complete work, and the like.
72. Effect of Achieving Material Completion. Upon the date when Material Completion is achieved, the following matters are conclusively determined:
a. The Owner may immediately occupy and secure the Work without restriction.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 28 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
b. All warranties begin to run from the date Material Completion is achieved.
c. The Owner is responsible for all insurance for the Project.
d. The Liquidated Damages daily rate is reduced to zero.
e. The Contractor may request payment of the remaining contract balance, including retainage, less amounts credited by the Owner or incurred as liquidated damages, and less amounts withheld for the punchlist by reason of Minor Items or Permitted Incomplete Work.
73. Certificates of Manufacturers for Major Components. For elevators, moving walks, dumbwaiters, escalators, lifts, major components of air conditioning systems (i.e., cooling towers, compressors, condensers, absorption units, chiller units, fan coil units, air handling units, boilers, base mounted pumps, and temperature controls); major components of heating systems (i.e., boilers, base mounted pumps, air handling units, unit ventilators, fan coil units, temperature controls, and boiler chemical feed systems); major components of plumbing systems (i.e., boilers, base mounted pumps, sewage pumps and water treatment systems) and incinerator systems; start-up, testing, and placing into operation shall be performed by the field representative(s) of the manufacturer(s), and certificate(s) of the manufacturer(s) shall be filed with the Owner on the letterhead(s) of the manufacturer(s) in which the manufacturer(s) certifies or certify that "the equipment has been installed in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturer(s) and is operating properly.” The manufacturer shall list in the certificate the item or items furnished to the job and the date, name, or other positive means of identifying any supplementary documents containing the recommendations of the manufacturer, with a copy of each of the supplementary documents attached to the certificate.
74. Warranty and Guaranty. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that all work executed under the Contract Documents shall be free from defects of materials or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of Completion. All written guarantees or warrantees as called for in the specifications shall specify the term and contact information for enforcement and shall be in such form as to permit direct enforcement by the Owner against any Trade Contractor, subcontractor, materialmen, or manufacturer related to the guarantee. The effective date of all warranties and guarantees shall be the date of the Certificate of Material Completion. Warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer’s certificates shall be provided to the Owner in a three ring binder(s) with a summary list of contents.
75. Correction of Work after Final Payment. Neither (1) the Certificate of Material Completion, (2) nor any decision of the Design Professional, (3) nor payment, (4) nor any provision in the contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials, faulty workmanship, or omission of contract work, and he shall remedy any defects or supply any omissions resulting therefrom and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects or omissions with reasonable promptness. The Contractor shall within the space of time designated in the notice of non-compliant work and without expense to the Owner, correct, remedy, replace, re-execute, supply omitted work, or remove from the premises all non- compliant work noted by the Design Professional. The Contractor shall give prompt notice in writing to the Design Professional, with copy to the Owner, upon completion of the supplying of any omitted work or the correction of any non-compliant work . In the absence of said notice, it shall be and is presumed under this contract that there has been no correction of the non- compliant work or supplying of omitted work. If the Contractor does not remove, make good the deficiency, correct, or remedy faulty work, or supply any omitted work within the space of time designated in notice of non-compliant work without expense to the Owner, the Owner, after ten days’ notice in writing to the Contractor, may remove the work, correct the work, remedy the work or supply omitted work at the expense of the Contractor. In case of emergency involving health, safety of property, or safety of life the Owner may proceed at once. Correction of defective work executed under the plans and specifications or supplying of omitted work whether or not covered by warranty of a subcontractor or materialmen, remains the primary, direct responsibility of the
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 29 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
Contractor. The foregoing obligation of the Contractor shall remain in effect until the same shall have been extinguished by operation of the statute of limitations. As additional security for the fulfillment of such obligation, but in no way limiting the same, the Contractor warrants and guarantees (1) that all work executed under the plans and specifications shall be free from defects of materials or workmanship for a period of one year from the date of the Certificate of Material Completion of the Design Professional, and (2) that for not less than one year from the date of the Certificate of Material Completion of the Design Professional, or for such greater space of time as may have been designated in the specifications, products of manufacturers shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship. Whenever written guaranties or warranties are called for, the Contractor shall furnish the aforesaid for such period of time as may be stipulated. The aforesaid instruments shall be in such form as to permit direct enforcement by the Owner against any subcontractor, materialmen, or manufacturer whose guaranty or warranty is called for, and the Contractor agrees that:
a. The Contractor is jointly and severally liable with such subcontractors, materialmen, or manufacturers.
b. The said subcontractors, materialmen, or manufacturers are agents of the Contractor for purposes of performance under this article, and the Contractor, as principal, ratifies the warranties or guaranties of his aforesaid agents by the filing of the aforesaid instruments with the Owner. The Contractor as principal is liable for the acts or omissions of his agents.
c. Service of notice on the Contractor that there has been breach of any warranty or guaranty will be sufficient to invoke the terms of the instrument, Provided: That the Owner shall have furnished the Contractor with a copy of notice served on the subcontractor, materialmen, or manufacturer.
d. The Contractor will bind his subcontractor, materialmen, and manufacturers to the terms of this article.
The calling for or the furnishing of written warranties shall in no way limit the contractual obligation of the Contractor as set forth hereinabove. The remedies stated in this article are in addition to the remedies otherwise available to the Owner, do not exclude such other remedies, and are without prejudice to any other remedies. [
76. Notification to Owner when Contractor Visits Site after Final Inspection.
a. When the Contractor’s representative visits the job site after the final inspection to perform specific work such as maintenance service, seasonal balance, or to correct a deficiency, the Contractor shall notify the Owner not less than 48 hours prior to the date on which they will visit the site, except under an emergency condition.
b. The Contractor shall visit the designated office of the Owner to notify the Owner that the Contractor is on the site prior to visit, thereby enabling the Owner representative to accompany the Contractor, should they so desire while the Contractor is on the project site.
c. A copy of the notification shall be provided to the Design Professional with the intent of the site visit. After the Contractor has completed the site visit, he shall give a written report to the Design Professional within five (5) days of the actions taken and any incomplete work yet to be performed.
77. Final Completion. Final Completion is the completion of all Work, including completion of all Minor Items and Permitted Incomplete Work as defined in Article 71. Final Completion shall be evidenced by the Design Professional’s Certificate of Final Completion. Final Completion shall be obtained not later than thirty (30) days after the last stated completion dates of any Minor Items or
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 30 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
Permitted Incomplete Work. The Design Professional’s Certificate of Final Completion shall not be issued until all Work is complete.
78. Payment for Final Completion. All amounts withheld from Payment for Material Completion and not credited to the Owner are payable upon receipt of final pay request from the Contractor. Final Payment shall be due 10 days after receipt by the Owner of the application for payment upon achievement and certification of Final Completion.
79. No Boycott of Israel. Contractor hereby certifies that it is not currently engaged in, and agrees for the duration of this Contract, not to engage in a boycott of Israel.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 31 of 38 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project M anual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016) ECS 2017
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That (Legal Name and Address of Contractorl) as principal (hereinafter referred to as ("Contractor"), and (Legal Title and Address of Surety) as surety (hereinafter referred to as "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the (Insert Name of Owner) as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner"), in the amount of DOLLARS ($ ), to which payment Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal has entered into a contract with the Owner bearing date of for (Insert Name of Project) in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: (Insert Name of Architect), which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform and comply with the terms and conditions of said contract; and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or loss to which said Owner may be subjected by reason of any wrongdoing, including patent infringement, misconduct, want of care or skill, default or failure of performance on the part of said Principal, his agents, subcontractors or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
1. The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications or drawings.
2. If pursuant to the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be declared in default by the Owner under the aforesaid Contract, the Surety shall promptly remedy the default or defaults or shall promptly perform the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions. It shall be the duty of the Surety to give an unequivocal notice in writing to the Owner within twenty-five (25) days after receipt of a declaration of default of the Surety`s election either to remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the contract promptly, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to the Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each item of condemned work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the contract. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal as justification for its failure to give notice of election or for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the contract.
3. Supplementary to and in addition to the foregoing, whenever the Owner shall notify the Surety that the Owner has notice that the Contractor has failed to pay any subcontractor, materialman, supplier, or laborer for labor or materials certified by the Contractor as having been paid for by the Contractor, the Surety shall, within 30 days of receipt of such notice, cause to be paid any unpaid amount for such labor or materials.
4. It is expressly agreed by the Principal and the Surety that the Owner, if he desires to do so, is at liberty to make inquiries at any time of subcontractors, laborers, materialmen, or other parties concerning the status of payments for labor, materials, or services furnished in the prosecution of the work.
5. The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in this bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents.
6. No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the Owner named herein or the legal successors of the Owner.
7. For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the Authorized State of Georgia Licensed Agent to whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this bond may be conducted will be as follows:
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 32 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
Name: Telephone: Address: City: State: Zip Code:
SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF , 20 .
ATTEST (Seal) (Name of Contractor)
By Secretary (Note 1) President
(Seal) (Name of Surety) (Note 2)
By: ______(Title) Resident Georgia Agent * Note 1. Please apply seal of Corporation over Secretary’s Signature. Note 2. Please apply seal of Surety and arrange for countersignature by a “Resident Georgia Agent” of Surety in order to comply with surety regulations of Georgia.
(*) Attach Power of Attorney
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 33 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
PAYMENT BOND
THIS BOND IS EXECUTED TOGETHER WITH ANOTHER BOND IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER AS OBLIGEE CONDITIONED UPON PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That (Legal Name and Address of Contractor) as Principal (hereinafter referred to as the "Principal") and (Legal Title and Address of Surety) as Surety (hereinafter referred to as “Surety”, are held and firmly bound unto the (Name of Owner) as Obligee (hereinafter referred to as "Owner") for the use and benefit of claimants defined, hereinafter in the amount of: DOLLARS ($ ) to which payment Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal has entered into a contract with the Owner bearing date of for (Insert Name of Project) in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by: (Insert Name of Architect), which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and materials supplied in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions:
1. The said Surety to this bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change or changes, extension of time or extensions of time, alteration or alterations or addition or additions to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications or drawings.
2. A claimant is defined as any subcontractor and any person supplying labor, materials, machinery, or equipment in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract.
3. Every person entitled to the protection hereunder and who has not been paid in full for labor or materials furnished in the prosecution of the work referred to in said bond before the expiration of a period of ninety days after the day on which the last of the labor was done or performed by him, or materials or equipment or machinery was furnished or supplied by him for which such claim is made, or when he has completed his subcontract for which claim is made, shall have the right to sue on such payment bond for the amount, or the balance thereof, unpaid at the time of the commencement of such action and to prosecute such action to final execution and judgment for the sum or sums due him; provided, however, that any person having direct contractual relationship with a subcontractor, but no contractual relationship express or implied with the contractor furnishing said payment bond, shall have the right of action upon the said payment bond upon giving written notice to said contractor within ninety days from the day on which such person did or performed the last of the labor, or furnished the last of the materials or machinery or equipment for which such claim is made, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was performed or done; provided further that nothing contained herein shall limit the right of action to said 90-day period. Notice may be served by depositing a notice, registered mail, postage prepaid, duly addressed to the contractor at any place he maintains an office or conducts his business, or his residence, in any post office or branch post office or any letter box under the control of the Post Office Department, or notice may be served in any manner in which the sheriffs of Georgia are authorized by law to serve summons or process. Every suit instituted under this section shall be brought in the name of the claimant without the Owner being made a party thereto. The official who has the custody of said bond is authorized and directed to furnish, to any person making application therefor who submits an affidavit that he has supplied labor or materials for such work and payment therefor has not been made, or that he is being sued on any such bond, a copy of such bond and the contract for which it was given, certified by the official who has custody of said bond; this copy shall be primary evidence of said bond and contract and shall be admitted in evidence without further proof. Applicants shall pay for such certified copies and such certified statements such fees as the official fixes to cover the cost of preparation thereof, but in no case shall the fee exceed the fees which the clerks of the superior courts are permitted to charge for similar copies.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 34 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
4. No action can be instituted on this bond after one year from the date of the Certificate of Material Completion of the Design Professional.
5. Further, this bond shall be considered the same as a bond furnished under §13-10-1 et seq., of the Code of Georgia, as amended, and all provisions of law pertaining to bonds furnished under said Section shall pertain hereto.
6. For the purposes of this bond, the name and address of the Authorized State of Georgia Licensed Agent to whom correspondence and telecommunications may be addressed and/or with whom business concerning this bond may be conducted will be as follows:
Name: Telephone: Address: City: State: Zip Code:
SIGNED AND SEALED THIS DAY OF , 20 .
ATTEST (Seal) (Name of Contractor)
By Secretary (Note 1) President
(Seal) (Name of Surety) (Note 2)
By: ______(Title) Resident Georgia Agent * Note 1. Please apply seal of Corporation over Secretary’s Signature. Note 2. Please apply seal of Surety and arrange for countersignature by a “Resident Georgia Agent” of Surety in order to comply with surety regulations of Georgia.
(*) Attach Power of Attorney
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 35 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
Georgia Department of Corrections CERTIFICATE OF MATERIAL COMPLETION
Project No. and Name:
Contractor: Design Professional: The Design Professional issues this Certificate of Material Completion of the Project and certifies as follows. Any exceptions to the below statements shall be identified and explained in Paragraph 13 below:
1. Having conducted observations and evaluations of the work in the presence of representatives of the Design Professional and its major consultants, the referenced project has been determined to be fully constructed and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations on (date of Inspection for Material Completion) with the exception of items shown on the attached Final Punch List [Notice of Non-Compliant Work No. ].
2. The “work” includes all construction, documents, submissions, attic stock, certificates, reports (including initial HVAC test and balance report), warranties, Marked-up Construction Documents, Final Certification of Costs, etc., called for in the Contract Documents, including all addenda and change orders.
3. The Final Punch List specifies items that constitute either a Minor Item or Permitted Incomplete Work, as defined in the General Conditions, and also stipulates an estimated completion date for each.
4. There are no outstanding Notices of Non-Compliant Work which are not restated on the Final Punch List. Such items must qualify as a Minor Item or Permitted Incomplete Work.
5. The total contract sum as of the date of Material Completion through Change Order No. is $0.00. The unpaid balance of the total contract sum (except as may be amended by future change orders) will be due and payable when all work has been fully completed and the contract fully performed at Project Final Completion.
6. There are no pending change orders resulting in credits or other credits due the Owner.
7. The amount to be withheld from Payment for Material Completion for each Minor Item or Permitted Incomplete Work as listed on the Final Punch List is as follows. Dates for completion of each item of Permitted Incomplete Work are indicated on the Final Punch List.
Total Value of Minor Items: $0.00 x 200%= $0.00 Total Value of Permitted Inc. Work: $0.00 x 100%= $0.00 Seasonal HVAC Balancing (Min. $1,000) $0.00 x ____= $0.00 Major Equipment Certificates: (Number) 0 x $500 = $0.00 Total Withheld = $0.00
8. All tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents have been made and were reviewed by a registered architect or registered engineer of the Design Professional. All work was found to meet or was brought into compliance to meet said tests and inspections in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 36 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
9. No work has been certified for payment that was covered prior to consent of the Design Professional.
10. All mechanical systems, equipment, apparatus and controls (electrical, heating plumbing, water, septic tank and sewage disposal fields, refrigeration, kitchen equipment, fire alarm, program and public address, etc.) have been started up, tested and inspected in the presence of a registered architect or registered engineer of the Design Professional, and have been found to be in safe operating condition, compliance with the Contract Documents and applicable codes.
11. All required operating instructions and maintenance manuals have been reviewed and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents by the Design Professional and transmitted to the Owner.
12. The State Fire Marshal has issued a Certificate (or Temporary Certificate) of Occupancy.
13. Exceptions (State Paragraph reference and explanation):
This Certificate is executed by the Design Professional this day of , 20 .
(Name of Design Professional Firm)
By: ______
(License Number and State) Printed Name: Title:
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 37 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
Georgia Department of Corrections CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION
Project No. and Name:
Design Professional: The Design Professional issues this Certificate of Final Completion of the Project and certifies as follows. Any exceptions to the below statements shall be identified and explained in Paragraph 10 below:
1. Having conducted observations and evaluations of the work in the presence of representatives of the Design Professional and its major consultants, the referenced project has been determined to be fully constructed and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable laws, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations on (date of Inspection for Final Completion) including all items shown on the Final Punch List [Notice of Non-Compliant Work No. ].
2. The “work” includes all construction, documents, submissions, attic stock, certificates, reports (including initial HVAC test and balance report), warranties, Marked-up Construction Documents, Final Certification of Costs, etc., called for in the Contract Documents, including all addenda and change orders.
3. There are no outstanding Notices of Non-Compliant Work.
4. The total contract sum as of the date of Final Completion through Change Order No. is $$0.00.
5. There are no pending change orders resulting in credits or other credits due the Owner.
6. All tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents have been made and were reviewed by a registered architect or registered engineer of the Design Professional. All work was found to meet or was brought into compliance to meet said tests and inspections in accordance with the Contract Documents.
7. No work has been certified for payment that was covered prior to consent of the Design Professional.
8. All mechanical systems, equipment, apparatus and controls have been started up, tested and inspected in the presence of a registered architect or registered engineer of the Design Professional, and have been found to be in safe operating condition, compliance with the Contract Documents and applicable codes. All required operating instructions and maintenance manuals have been reviewed and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents by the Design Professional and transmitted to the Owner.
9. The State Fire Marshal has issued a Certificate (or Temporary Certificate) of Occupancy.
10. Exceptions (State Paragraph reference and explanation):
This Certificate is executed by the Design Professional this day of , 20 .
(Name of Design Professional Firm)
By: ______
(License Number and State) Printed Name: Title:
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 38 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT
Project Number and Name: Construction Professional:
STATE OF GEORGIA;
COUNTY OF :
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: Pursuant to the Construction Agreement dated (Insert Date), between (Insert Name of Contractor) and the Georgia State Financing and Investment Commission, the Construction Professional certifies as follows: 1. All work required under the Construction Agreement has been performed in accordance with the terms thereof except as listed on attached Schedule A. Check if Schedule A is attached 2. All Subcontractors have been paid and satisfied in full except as listed on attached Schedule B. Check if Schedule B is attached 3. There are no outstanding claims of any character, including disputed claims or any claims to which the Construction Professional has or will assert any defense, arising out of the performance of the Construction Agreement except as listed on attached Schedule C. Check if Schedule C is attached 4. To the best of his knowledge and belief there are no unsatisfied claims for damages resulting from injury or death to any employees, Subcontractors, or the public at large arising out of the performance of the contract, or any suits or claims for any other damage of any kind, nature, or description except as listed on attached Schedule D. Check if Schedule D is attached 5. There has been no exertion or attempted exertion of any influence by any employee, officer, or agent of the Owner, or any person connected with the State Government of Georgia, on the CM/GC in the purchase of materials, equipment, or other items involved in construction, manufacture, or employment of labor under the aforesaid Agreement.
The undersigned makes this affidavit for the purpose of receiving payment for Material Completion; or, in the case of Final Payment, for full settlement of all claims against the Owner arising under or by virtue of the Construction Agreement except as stated above. Acceptance of such payment is acknowledged as a release of the Owner from any and all claims arising under or by virtue of the Agreement except as stated above.
This Affidavit is executed by the Construction Professional this (Day) day of (Month), (Year). (Insert Name of Construction Firm)
By: ______, (Name and Title of Signatory)
SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME ON THIS THE
_____ DAY OF ______, 20__
______[NOTARY SEAL] Notary Public
My Commission Expires: ______
.
Section C - General Conditions & Exhibits – General Conditions Page 39 of 39 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
Section D Supplementary General Conditions
Section D contains revisions which hereby modify, delete from, and add to the provisions of Section C General Conditions & Exhibits.
D-01. Site Location The contractor will perform all work required herein at the following site location: Arrendale State Prison 2023 Gainesville Hwy. Alto, GA 30510 D-02 A pre-construction conference will be scheduled after the receipt and approval of the items listed below. All items are due not less than 5 days prior to the pre-construction conference. The proceed order may be issued at the conference.
a. Executed construction contract b. Payment and performance bonds c. Proof of mandatory insurance d. Contractor / Subcontractor affidavits e. Project safety plan f. List of intended subcontractors g. Preliminary construction schedule h. Schedule of values
D-03. A copy of the approved safety plan along with the AGC’s Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction and/or OSHA Standards for Construction (OSHA29 CFR) shall be on-site during construction.
D-04 The attached GDC Change Order Form will be used for all contract modifications in accordance with Section C-General Conditions, Article 49a & b, (Section D – Attachment #1). Change order proposals must include a detailed quantity estimate broken out by labor hours, material, equipment and mark-ups.
D.05. GDC Facility Security Provisions During the construction period, the following mandatory provisions will be enforced for the security of the facility and the safety of construction personnel:
a. The Contractor will submit names and identification, via the GDC Criminal/Driver History Consent Form, (Section D – Attachment #2), of all personnel who will be within the facility security perimeter fence. A security background check will be performed. Submission of the consent form is to be a minimum of 72 hours prior to anticipated arrival for access. The facility will provide temporary passes to the contractor, subcontractors, vendors, and miscellaneous personnel who are acceptable to the owner. The failure of any employee to be granted access to the facility as a result of being determined to be a security risk will not be grounds for the Contractor to request an extension of time. b. A facility lockdown for security reasons shall not be grounds for consideration for additional compensation for delay. These circumstances are beyond the owner’s control and may occur during the course of the work. The department will make every effort to minimize the impact on the contractor’s operation. The contractor must understand that security is the number one priority at all times.
c. All work shall be coordinated with the Facility’s Designated Representative (FDR). The following work schedule limitations shall apply, Monday – Friday, 7:30 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. The contractor should assume no work will be performed on State holidays unless permission is given by the FDR. Any deviation from the scheduled work hours and holidays must be approved by the FDR in writing no less than 24 hours before the requested time. A list of all 2017 state holidays is attached, (Section D – Attachment #3).
d. All personnel and vehicles entering onto Georgia Department of Corrections’ property are subject to being searched at any time. Periodic unscheduled searches may be expected. Contractor should anticipate delays in entering and exiting the facility. These delays can vary depending on traffic at the entrance gate.
Section D- Supplementary General Conditions Page 1 of 2 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
e. It is the contractor’s responsibility to keep tools stored and accounted for on a daily basis as required. Inventory sheets must be completed for each visit. Tools are to be inventoried going into and coming out of the facility or secured storage. If any tools are approved to be secured overnight on-site, they must be inventoried daily.
f. No motorized equipment, hot tools, excess or unused material shall be left unsecured inside the fence overnight without the consent of the Facility Designated Representative. All equipment, tools and material stored in the designated laydown areas outside the fence shall be secured by the contractor at their risk. Keys to equipment and vehicles shall be removed from vehicles/equipment when not in use. g. Contraband will not be permitted on Georgia Department of Corrections facility property. Contraband includes but is not limited to drugs, intoxicating liquors, tobacco, weapons of any kind.
h. No personal cell phones will be permitted within the facility’s security fence. A company cell phone must be approved by the facility designated representative and checked in and out with each visit.
i. No contact or trafficking of any sort between construction personnel and inmates is permitted.
j. A Correctional Officer (CO) will escort all personnel performing work within the facility security fence. One CO will be assigned to this project. If an additional officer is requested by the contractor, so that the contractor may perform work in more than one area simultaneously, it must be approved by the Facility Designated Representative. The availability of additional COs will be a determining factor. D-06. Energy Efficiency and Sustainable Construction Standards for State Buildings Comply with provisions for Georgia-based Materials and Products.
a. The project shall utilize Georgia Products such that not less than 10 percent of all building materials used in the project are harvested, extracted, or manufactured in the State of Georgia where such products are commercially available.
D-07 Replace “State Fire Marshall” with “GDC Agency Fire Marshall” for all references in contract including but not limited to Article 55 of Section C-General Conditions
Section D- Supplementary General Conditions Page 2 of 2 SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
SECTION E SPECIFICATIONS (INSERT SPECIFICATIONS)
Section E - Specifications SCAR – Small Construction and Renovation Project Manual GSFIC-AD-180 (4/29/2016)
ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.
B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.
C. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project.
D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Design Professional.
F. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated.
G. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials.
H. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.
I. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated.
J. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
K. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
L. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Alteration Work Subschedule: A construction schedule coordinating the sequencing and scheduling of alteration work for entire Project, including each activity to be performed, and based on Contractor's Construction Schedule. Secure time commitments for performing critical construction activities from separate entities responsible for alteration work.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best Work results. 2. Coordinate sequence of alteration work activities to accommodate the following:
a. Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building. b. Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. c. Other known work in progress. d. Tests and inspections.
3. Detail sequence of alteration work, with start and end dates. 4. Utility Services: Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. Coordinate shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
B. Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation: Coordinate alteration work with circulation patterns within Project building(s) and site. Some work is near circulation patterns and adjacent to restricted areas. Circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely and in places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Access to restricted areas may not be obstructed. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK
A. Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work: Before starting alteration work, Design Professional will conduct conference at Project site.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Design Professional, and Contractor, testing service representative, specialists, and chemical-cleaner manufacturer(s) shall be represented at the meeting. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work, including review of the following:
a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Discuss and finalize; verify availability of materials, specialists' personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. b. Fire-prevention plan. c. Governing regulations. d. Areas where existing construction is to remain and the required protection. e. Hauling routes. f. Sequence of alteration work operations.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
g. Storage, protection, and accounting for salvaged and specially fabricated items. h. Existing conditions, staging, and structural loading limitations of areas where materials are stored. i. Qualifications of personnel assigned to alteration work and assigned duties. j. Requirements for extent and quality of work, tolerances, and required clearances. k. Embedded work such as flashings and lintels, special details, collection of waste, protection of occupants and the public, and condition of other construction that affects the Work or will affect the work.
3. Reporting: Design Professional will record conference results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from conference.
B. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings specifically for alteration work at monthly intervals. Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Design Professional, and Contractor, each specialist, supplier, installer, and other entity concerned with progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of alteration work activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to alteration work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Review progress since last coordination meeting. Determine whether each schedule item is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited with retention of quality; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities are completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Alteration Work Subschedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including review items listed in the "Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work" Paragraph in this article and the following:
1) Interface requirements of alteration work with other Project Work. 2) Status of submittals for alteration work. 3) Access to alteration work locations. 4) Effectiveness of fire-prevention plan. 5) Quality and work standards of alteration work. 6) Change Orders for alteration work.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1.6 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered or uncovered during the Work, regardless of whether they were previously documented, remain Owner's property.
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Alteration Work Subschedule:
1. Submit preliminary schedule 5 days before Pre-construction conference.
2. Submit final alteration work subschedule within 7 days of date established for commencement of alteration work
B. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that are to remain, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by Contractor's alteration work operations.
C. Alteration Work Program: Submit 10 days before work begins.
D. Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit 5 days before Pre-construction conference.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Specialist Qualifications: An experienced firm regularly engaged in specialty work similar in nature, materials, design, and extent to alteration work as specified in each Section and that has completed a minimum of five recent projects with a record of successful in-service performance that demonstrates the firm's qualifications to perform this work.
1. Field Supervisor Qualifications: Full-time supervisors experienced in specialty work similar in nature, material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supervisors shall be on-site when specialty work begins and during its progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the control of the specialist firm.
a. Construct new mockups of required work whenever a supervisor is replaced.
B. Title X Requirement: Each firm conducting activities that disturb painted surfaces shall be a "Lead-Safe Certified Firm" according to 40 CFR 745, Subpart E, and use only workers that are trained in lead-safe work practices.
C. Alteration Work Program: Prepare a written plan for alteration work for whole Project, including each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during operations. Show compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this and other Sections. Coordinate this whole-Project alteration work program with specific requirements of programs required in other alteration work Sections.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Dust and Noise Control: Include locations of proposed temporary dust- and noise-control partitions and means of egress from occupied areas coordinated with continuing on-site operations and other known work in progress. 2. Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes, turning radii, and locations and details of temporary protective barriers.
D. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work, including placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-control devices during each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection equipment and requirements. Include fire-watch personnel's training, duties, and authority to enforce fire safety.
E. Safety and Health Standard: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.
1.9 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS
A. Salvaged Materials:
1. Clean loose dirt and debris from salvaged items unless more extensive cleaning is indicated. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
B. Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation:
1. Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during handling. Label contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated.
C. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Design Professional, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete.
D. Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures.
1. Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its original location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or photographs by annotating the identifying marks. 2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3. Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5 deg F or more above the dew point.
E. Storage Space:
1. Owner will arrange for limited on-site location(s) for free storage of salvaged material. This storage space does not include security and climate control for stored material. 2. Arrange for off-site locations for storage and protection of salvaged material that cannot be stored and protected on-site.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions that affect the Work by use of preconstruction photographs. See General Conditions for more information.
B. Discrepancies: Notify Design Professional of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with removal and dismantling work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.
1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being protected. 2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from areas where alteration work is being performed. 3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes. 4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work. 5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the public or adjacent surfaces. 6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural elements. 7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining. 8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate demolition work from other areas of the building.
B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:
1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove existing materials unless otherwise indicated.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the alteration work program.
C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.
D. Utility and Communications Services:
1. Comply with provisions in General Conditions. 2. Notify Owner, Design Professional, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before commencing operations. 3. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as required for alteration work. 4. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities.
E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify Design Professional immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly.
1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by sand or other materials resulting from alteration work. 2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean water to pass.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE
A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:
1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. Perform duties titled "Owner's Responsibility for Fire Protection." 2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.
a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such materials.
B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are anticipated:
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding or other high-heat equipment. Notify Owner at least 72 hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work. 2. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the building. 3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe. 4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material. 5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings. 6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed. Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:
a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms. b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from fire-watch duties. c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are not present. d. Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire prevention is maintained. e. Maintain fire-watch personnel at Project site until 60 minutes after conclusion of daily work.
C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fire- extinguisher and blanket use.
3.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS
A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and adhesives.
B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in alteration work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof and UV resistant and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective materials.
C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.
D. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.
3.4 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK
A. Have specialty work performed only by qualified specialists.
B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.
C. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress during the work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs or video recordings.Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from alterations.
D. Notify Design Professional of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.
1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Design Professional.
END OF SECTION 013516
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 9 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 10 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY and TESTING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Design Professional, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are listed in individual Specification Sections. 5. A Schedule of Special Inspection requirements are given at the end of this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
E. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.
F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
G. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
H. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Design Professional.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Design Professional for direction before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Design Professional for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.
B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
E. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.
F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Design Professional. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality- control tests and inspections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the Statement of Special Inspections. 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Design Professional has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspection will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Design Professional and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Design Professional and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
E. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
F. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality- control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's Construction Schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Design Professional, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and in the Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Notifying Design Professional and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Design Professional with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Design Professional. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Design Professional's reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017 SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
INSPECTION DEFINITIONS:
PERFORM: Perform these tasks for each weld, fastener or bolted connection, and noted verification.
OBSERVE: Observe these items randomly during the course of each work day to insure that applicable requirements are being met. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections at contractor’s risk.
DOCUMENT: Document, with a report, that the work has been performed in accordance with the contract documents. This is in addition to any other reports required in the Special Inspections guide specification.
CONTINUOUS: Constant monitoring of identified tasks by a special inspector over the duration of performance of said tasks.
A. STRUCTURAL - STEEL – WELDING SECTION STEEL INSPECTION PRIOR TO WELDING – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Table C-N5.4-1 TASK INSPECTION TYPE1 DESCRIPTION 1. Verify that the welding PERFORM procedures specification (WPS) is available 2. Verify manufacturer PERFORM certifications for welding consumables are available 3. Verify material identification PERFORM Type and grade. 4. Welder Identification PERFORM The fabricator or erector, as applicable, shall maintain a System system by which a welder who has welded a joint or member can be identified. Stamps, if used, shall be the low-stress type. 5. Fit-up of groove welds OBSERVE Joint preparation (including joint geometry) Dimensions (alignment, root opening, root face, bevel) Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) Tacking (tack weld quality and location) Backing type and fit (if applicable) 6. Configuration and finish of OBSERVE access holes 7. Fit-up of fillet welds OBSERVE Dimensions (alignment, gaps at root) Cleanliness (condition of steel surfaces) Tacking (tack weld quality and location) STEEL INSPECTION DURING WELDING – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Table C-N5.4-2
1 PERFORM: Perform these tasks for each weld, fastener or bolted connection, and required verification. OBSERVE: Observe these items on a random sampling basis daily to insure that applicable requirements are met. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections at contractor’s risk. ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
TASK INSPECTION TYPE DESCRIPTION 8. Use of qualified welders PERFORM Welding by welders, welding operators, and tack welders who are qualified in conformance with requirements. 9. Control and handling of OBSERVE Packaging welding consumables Electrode atmospheric exposure control 10. No welding over cracked OBSERVE tack welds 11. Environmental conditions OBSERVE Wind speed within limits Precipitation and temperature 12. Welding Procedures OBSERVE Settings on welding equipment Specification followed Travel speed Selected welding materials Shielding gas type/flow rate Preheat applied Interpass temperature maintained (min./max.) Proper position (F, V, H, OH) Intermix of filler metals avoided 13. Welding techniques OBSERVE Interpass and final cleaning Each pass within profile limitations Each pass meets quality requirements
A. STRUCTURAL - STEEL – WELDING SECTION (CONTINUED) STEEL INSPECTION AFTER WELDING – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 2015 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Table C-N5.4-3 TASK INSPECTION TYPE 1 DESCRIPTION 14. Welds cleaned OBSERVE 15. Size, length, and location of all PERFORM Size, length, and location of all welds conform to the welds requirements of the detail drawings. 16. Welds meet visual acceptance PERFORM AND Crack prohibition criteria DOCUMENT Weld/base-metal fusion Crater cross section Weld profiles Weld size Undercut Porosity 17. Arc strikes PERFORM 18. k-area PERFORM When welding of doubler plates, continuity plates or stiffeners has been performed in the k-area, visually inspect the web k-area for cracks. 19. Backing removed, weld tabs PERFORM removed and finished, and fillet welds added where required 20. Repair activities PERFORM AND DOCUMENT 21. Document acceptance or PERFORM rejection of welded joint or member
1 PERFORM: Perform these tasks for each weld, fastener or bolted connection, and required verification. DOCUMENT: Document in a report that the work has been performed as required. This is in addition to all other required reports. ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017 B. STRUCTURAL - STEEL – BOLTING SECTION
STEEL INSPECTION TASKS PRIOR TO BOLTING – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Table C-N5.6-1 TASK INSPECTION TYPE 1 DESCRIPTION 1. Manufacture’s certifications available for PERFORM fastener materials 2. Fasteners marked in accordance with OBSERVE ASTM requirements 3. Proper fasteners selected for joint detail OBSERVE (grade, type, bolt length if threads are to be excluded from shear plane) 4. Proper bolting procedure selected for joint OBSERVE detail 5. Connecting elements, including OBSERVE appropriate faying surface condition and hole preparation, if specified, meet applicable requirements 6. Proper storage provided for bolts, nuts, OBSERVE washers, and other fastener components STEEL INSPECTION TASKS DURING BOLTING – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Table C-N5.6-2 TASK INSPECTION TYPE 1 DESCRIPTION 7. Fastener assemblies of suitable condition, OBSERVE placed in all holes and washers (if required) are positioned as required 8. Joint brought to the snug-tight condition OBSERVE prior to pretensioning operation 9. Fastener component not turned by the OBSERVE wrench prevented from rotating 10. Bolts are pretensioned in accordance with OBSERVE RCSC Specification, progressing systematically from the most rigid point toward the free edges STEEL INSPECTION TASKS AFTER BOLTING – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Table C-N5.6-3 TASK INSPECTION TYPE 1 DESCRIPTION 11. Document acceptance or rejection of all DOCUMENT bolted connections END SECTION
1 PERFORM: Perform these tasks for each weld, fastener or bolted connection, and required verification. OBSERVE: Observe these items on a random sampling basis daily to insure that applicable requirements are met. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections at contractor’s risk. DOCUMENT: Document in a report that the work has been performed as required. This is in addition to all other required reports. ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017 C. STRUCTURAL - STEEL - NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING SECTION
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINTS – VERIFY THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE IBC 1705.2.1, AISC 360-10: Section N5.5 TASK INSPECTION TYPE 1 DESCRIPTION 1. Use of qualified PERFORM Visual weld inspection and nondestructive testing (NDT) shall nondestructive testing be conducted by personnel qualified in accordance with AWS personnel D1.8 clause 7.2
END SECTION
1 PERFORM: Perform these tasks for each weld, fastener or bolted connection, and required verification. OBSERVE: Observe these items on a random sampling basis daily to insure that applicable requirements are met. Operations need not be delayed pending these inspections at contractor’s risk. ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Shelf angles.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting.
B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.6 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.
C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
C. Galvanize and prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.
C. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
C. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Smoke detectors.
5. Perimeter moldings.
B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations:
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.
C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. System ACT-1: a. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular. b. Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured). c. Color: White. d. LR: Not less than 0.80. e. NRC: Not less than 0.70. f. CAC: Not less than 30. g. AC: Not less than 190. h. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. i. Thickness: 3/4 inch. j. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. System ACT-2: a. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 1, plastic. Binder shall not contain urea formaldehyde. b. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured). c. Color: White. d. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.85. e. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 27. f. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 1.00. g. Articulation Class (AC): Not less than 190. h. Thermal Performance: Thermal resistance (R) value: Not less than R-11. i. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. j. Thickness: 3 inches. k. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.
C. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.
D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.
E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 6. Gasket System: Clean-room type.
2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels in a basket-weave pattern.
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board. 3. Concrete
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: (Flat) Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: (Matt) Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. Gloss Level 3: (Eggshell) 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. Gloss Level 4: (Eggshell/ Satin /Pearl) 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. Gloss Level 5: (Semi-Gloss) 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: (Gloss) 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: 9 High –Gloss) More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. VOC content.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of EPA and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 2. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match adjacent surfaces.
1. 10 percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior:
2.4 BLOCK FILLERS A. Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior: MPI #4.
2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based :MPI #107 B. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal: MPI#79 C. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal: MPI #76 D. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134
2.6 WATER-BASED PAINTS A. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI # 144 B. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 3): MPI # 145 C. Latex, Interior, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI # 147 D. Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, Rest rooms (Gloss Level 3):MPI # 139
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Design Professional reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. The services of a qualified testing agency may be engaged to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Design Professional may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Other items as directed by Architect.
2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
B. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3).
2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
a. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 3).
B. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3).
2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4).
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5).
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5).
E. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3).
2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 4).
END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve.
1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.5 for flanges on steel valves. 4. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 5. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.
H. Valves in Insulated Piping:
1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES
A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Regular Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Apollo Valves; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Bronze or brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Regular.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.
C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.
B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For PVC/CPVC Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Brass ball valves, two-piece with regular port and brass trim.
END OF SECTION 220523.12
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523.12 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 221116 – “Domestic Water Piping."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," and "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. K-Flex USA.
G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning.
2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.
B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Aeroflex USA, Inc. b. Armacell LLC. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. K-Flex USA.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. f. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.5 SEALANTS
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 9 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 10 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 11 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Cold Water:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
B. Domestic Hot Water:
1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:
1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 220719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 12 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. CPVC piping. 2. PVC pipe and fittings. 3. Piping joining materials. 4. Transition fittings. 5. Dielectric fittings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
C. Comply with NSF Standard 372 for low lead.
2.2 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
B. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.
C. Malleable-Iron Unions:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. ASME B16.39, Class 150. 2. Hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface. 4. Threaded ends.
2.3 CPVC PIPING
A. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 40.
1. CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40. 2. CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437, Schedule 80.
B. CPVC Piping System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings.
2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40.
C. PVC Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.
2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
B. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements:
1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.
C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Description:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
a. CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions. b. One end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Description:
a. CPVC or PVC four-part union. b. Brass threaded end. c. Solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end. d. Rubber O-ring. e. Union nut.
2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Standard: ASSE 1079. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 3. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 4. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 5. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
D. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 2. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 3. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 4. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 5. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.
D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
D. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
E. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.
3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.
C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 221116 “Domestic Water Piping."
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
D. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
E. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72 inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger.
F. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 and Smaller: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
G. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.
H. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's written instructions.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Piping Inspections:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Piping Tests:
a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water- sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.
D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. CPVC, Schedule 40; socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
2. PVC, Schedule 40; socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
END OF SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of, electric, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.
B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years. b. Compression Tanks: Five years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
A. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Smith, A. O. Corporation. c. State Industries.
2. Standard: UL 174. 3. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water outlet. g. Heating Elements: One; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for simultaneous operation unless otherwise indicated. h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system. j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Capacity and Characteristics:
1. Capacity: 6 gallons. 2. Recovery: 11 gph at 50 deg F temperature rise. 3. Temperature Setting: 120 deg F. 4. Power Demand: 1.5 kW.
5. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: 120. b. Phases: Single. c. Hertz: 60.
2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Smith, A. O. Corporation. c. State Industries.
2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory- installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
4. Capacity and Characteristics:
a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. b. Capacity Acceptable: 2 gal. minimum.
B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.
C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.
E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic- water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
F. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than domestic- water heater working-pressure rating.
G. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters on concrete base. 1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated. 2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping."
C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
D. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
E. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.
F. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
END OF SECTION 223300
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:
1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C. Service Factor: 1.15.
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
I. Insulation: Class F.
J. Code Letter Designation:
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.
B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters. 2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Brady Corporation. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. Seton Identification Products.
2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Black. 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
END OF SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. BAS: Building automation systems.
C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.
G. TDH: Total dynamic head.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certified TAB reports.
B. Controls calibration certification.
C. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
5. Dates of calibration.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB as a TAB technician.
B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
K. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
L. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:
1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.
B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Airside:
a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume dampers are open and functional. c. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. f. Ceilings are installed. g. Windows and doors are installed. h. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
D. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
K. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. d. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:
a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.
3. Two-speed, Variable Frequency Drive controlled fans: a. Manually engage second fan-speed setting. b. Measure total airflow using procedure outlined in paragraph A.1 above c. Adjust VFD setpoint as required to deliver reduced supply airflow as specified by manufacturer’s specifications. Record airflow and VFD Frequency setting.
4. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full- heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.
1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.
D. Verify final system conditions.
1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary. 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.
C. Measure space Temperature and Relative Humidity and confirm accuracy of Control Devices within the following tolerances:
1. Space Temperature Sensors: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F 2. Space Humidity Sensors: For Temperatures Between 59 and 77 Deg F and Relative Humidity between Zero and 90 Percent: Plus or Minus 2 percent.
3.7 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. 4. Certify calibration and programming of control devices.
B. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters.
C. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.
D. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Outdoor airflow in cfm. g. Return airflow in cfm.
E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.
F. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.
G. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft..
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. h. Space Relative Humidity in percent.
H. Control Device Calibration:
1. Submit Certification that the programmable thermostats and/or humidistats have been programmed with the Owner’s occupancy schedule and unit operation has been tested in the Occupied Mode, Unoccupied Mode, Dehumidification Mode and Economizer Mode per the sequence of operations on the contract drawings. Submit setpoints for each unit.
2. Report Data:
a. Device type and make. b. Location.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
c. Space temperature in deg F. d. Space Relative Humidity in percent. e. Device temperature reading in deg F. f. Device Relative Humidity in percent. g. Heating, Cooling and Humidity setpoints for Occupied and Unoccupied mode.
I. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. f. Controls Calibration and Programming g.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners for return ductwork.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.
G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
2.3 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Knauf Insulation. c. Vimasco Corporation.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
2.4 SEALANTS
A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum.
2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Jacket:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. RPR Products, Inc.
2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.
2.7 TAPES
A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
e. Venture Tape.
2. Width: 3 inches.
3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.8 SECUREMENTS
A. Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Hardcast, Inc. 4) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 5) Nelson Stud Welding.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.4 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
4. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor- barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 9 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
4. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 5. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.
3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
B. Items Not Insulated:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed, round supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 10 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. Concealed, round outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E. Concealed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F. Exposed, round supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
G. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H. Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
I. Exposed, supply-air plenum insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.9 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:
1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.10 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 11 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:
1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.024 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 230713
DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 12 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt- welded longitudinal seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.
D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 2. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class A. 4. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 5. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class A. 7. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 8. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units and Heat Pumps:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
B. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units and Heat Pumps:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
C. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.
D. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units and Heat Pumps:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
E. Intermediate Reinforcement:
1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
F. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 10 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded.
**Delete paragraph below if branch fittings are detailed on Drawings.
G. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Duct accessory hardware.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Flex-Tek Group. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Ruskin Company. d. Vent Products Co., Inc.
2. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 3. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 4. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 5. Frames: a. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
6. Blades:
a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.
7. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 8. Bearings:
a. Molded synthetic.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
9. Blade Seals: Felt. 10. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum. 11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 12. Accessories:
a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.
2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.
C. Material: Galvanized steel.
D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
2.5 TURNING VANES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO LLC.
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
G. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct.
1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.
B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
G. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
I. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
J. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper.
END OF SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Broan-NuTone LLC. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. PennBarry.
B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.
F. Accessories:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. 3. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
4. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
END OF SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 233713.23 - REGISTERS AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adjustable blade face registers and grilles.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to registers and grilles. 2. Section 233716 "Fabric Air-Diffusion Devices" for continuous tubular diffusers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REGISTERS
A. Adjustable Blade Face Register:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. METALAIRE, Inc. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Price Industries. d. Titus. e. Tuttle & Bailey.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
2.2 GRILLES
A. Adjustable Blade Face Grille:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. METALAIRE, Inc. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Price Industries. d. Titus. e. Tuttle & Bailey.
2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate registers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where registers and grilles are installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install registers and grilles level and plumb.
B. Outlets and Inlets Locations: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. Install registers and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust registers and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713.23
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
REGISTERS AND GRILLES 233713.23 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 233716 - FABRIC AIR-DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes continuous, tubular, fabric air-distribution devices.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabric air-distribution devices.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and suspension and attachment details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Airmax International. 2. DuctSox Corp. 3. Fabric Duct Systems.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Continuous tubular diffuser materials shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 2518 and NFPA 90A.
B. Air permeability of fabric will comply with ASTM D737.
FABRIC AIR-DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 233716 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.3 CONTINUOUS TUBULAR DIFFUSERS
A. Description:
1. Fabric: Woven anti-microbial polyester. 2. Shape: Round. 3. Air-Outlet Configuration: Permeable fabric. 4. Air-Outlet Configuration: Lengthwise hole pattern. 5. Color: Tan.
B. Duct Connection Type: Round worm-gear band.
C. Accessories:
1. Quick-connect joint. 2. Snap hooks. 3. Cleanout zipper. 4. End cap. 5. Draw cords. 6. Removable support hoops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
END OF SECTION 233716
FABRIC AIR-DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 233716 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 237416.11 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEAT PUMP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged, outdoor, rooftop heat pump units (RTUs) with the following components and accessories:
1. Casings. 2. Fans. 3. Motors. 4. Coils. 5. Refrigerant circuit components. 6. Air filtration. 7. Dampers. 8. Electrical power connections. 9. Controls. 10. Accessories. 11. Roof curbs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MERV: Minimum efficiency reporting value.
B. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, rooftop air-conditioning units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground.
C. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
D. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each RTU.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Include manufacturer's technical data. 2. Include rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Wall-mounted programmable temperature/humidity sensors. 4. Wall-mounted or Unit-mounted Carbon Dioxide (CO2) sensors.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven fan. 2. Filters: One set(s) of filters for each unit.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. AHRI Compliance:
1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. 4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger.
B. AMCA Compliance:
1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311. 2. Damper leakage tested according to AMCA 500-D. 3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
C. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International. 4. Trane. 5. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.3 CASINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
B. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with 2-inch foam insulation and seal moisture tight for R-13 performance.
C. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.
D. Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements:
1. Inside Casing: G-90-coated galvanized steel, 0.028 inch thick.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Fabricated using stainless-steel sheet 0.025 inch thick, a minimum of 2 inches deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for design and construction of drain pans.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. 2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
F. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2.4 FANS
A. Supply-Air Fans: Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls.
1. Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motor shall be resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. 2. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Motors shall be installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing.
B. Condenser-Coil Fan: propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated ECM motors.
2.5 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
C. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 104 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.
D. Shall be suitable for Variable Frequency Drive and two-speed operation.
E. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
F. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
G. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements.
H. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
I. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
J. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
K. Insulation: Class F.
L. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
M. Enclosure Material: rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.
2.6 COILS
A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil:
1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. 2. Coil Split: Interlaced. 3. Coated.
B. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil:
1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. 2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coils from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan.
C. Electric-Resistance Heating:
1. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware. 2. Over Temperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box. 3. Overcurrent Protection: Manual-reset thermal cutouts, factory wired in each heater stage. 4. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the following controls:
a. Magnetic contactors. b. Controller: One of the following: 1) Step Controller: Pilot lights and override toggle switch for each step. 2) SCR Controller: Pilot lights operate on load ratio, a minimum of five steps. c. Time-delay relay. d. Airflow proving switch.
2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Compressor: Hermetic, variable-speed scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.
B. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.
2.8 AIR FILTRATION
A. Minimum arrestance and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2.
2.9 DAMPERS
A. Leakage Rate: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.
B. Damper Motor: Modulating with two adjustable position stops, in addition to 100% open and 100% closed.
C. Outdoor Air / Economizer 1. Shall be capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air. 2. Shall be equipped with a barometric or fan-assisted relief damper capable of relieving up to 100% return air. 3. Shall be designed to close damper(s) during loss-of-power situations with spring return built into motor. 4. Dampers shall be completely closed during Unoccupied Mode.
2.10 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS
A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection.
2.11 CONTROLS
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified sheet M-001, “MECHANICAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION."
B. Basic Unit Controls:
1. Control-voltage transformer with resettable circuit breaker.
2. Unit-mounted central control board with the following features: a. Operating temperature range of -30°F to 150°F. b. Integrated differential-enthalpy economizer controller. c. The controller shall accept the following inputs:
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1) Space temperature 2) Setpoint adjustment 3) Outdoor air temperature 4) Indoor air temperature 5) Indoor relative humidity 6) Compressor lock-out 7) Smoke shutdown 8) Enthalpy 9) Fan status
3. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:
a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. c. Fan-speed switch. d. Automatic changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Concealed set point. g. Exposed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied-period-override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature and humidity set points, occupied and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature and humidity, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.
4. Wall-mounted humidistat or sensor with the following features:
a. Concealed set point. b. Exposed indication.
5. Unit-Mounted Annunciator Panel for Each Unit:
a. Lights to indicate power on, cooling, heating, fan running, filter dirty, and unit alarm or failure. b. DDC controller or programmable timer and interface with HVAC instrumentation and control system. c. Digital display of outdoor-air temperature, supply-air temperature, return-air temperature, economizer damper position, indoor-air quality, and control parameters.
2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Low-ambient kit using variable-speed condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F.
B. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss.
C. Remote potentiometer to adjust minimum economizer damper position.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 7 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
D. Factory- or field-installed, demand-controlled ventilation.
E. Safeties:
1. Smoke detector. 2. Compressor over temperature, over current. 3. Condensate overflow switch. 4. Phase-loss protection. 5. High and low pressure control. 6. Evaporator coil freeze protection. 7. Automatic reset motor thermal overload.
F. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire.
G. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing.
H. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open.
I. Outdoor-air intake weather hood with moisture eliminator.
J. Oil separator.
2.13 ROOF CURBS
A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory- installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.
1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
B. Curb Dimensions: Height of 14 inches.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 8 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs.
B. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "NRCA Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems. Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction. Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing with anchor bolts.
B. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.
C. Where installing piping adjacent to RTUs, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. 4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. 5. Inspect internal insulation. 6. Verify that labels are clearly visible. 7. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 9 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 9. Verify that filters are installed. 10. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. 11. Remove packing from vibration isolators. 12. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. 13. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. 14. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 15. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Start refrigeration system. b. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. c. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
16. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 17. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 18. Calibrate thermostats. 19. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 20. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke. 21. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F above return-air temperature:
a. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. b. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. c. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. d. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
22. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 23. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.
a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Relief-air volume. d. Outdoor-air intake volume.
24. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:
a. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. b. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake.
25. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:
a. Low-temperature safety operation. b. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. c. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover.
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 10 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
26. After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs.
END OF SECTION 237416.11
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 11 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PACKAGED, ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 237416.11 - 12 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. c. For Labor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 2. Trane; a unit of Ingersoll Rand. 3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.
2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Floor-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Design Professional.
a. Cabinet finish color: Manufacturer’s standard color.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
b. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. c. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated. 2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal- expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. 3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. 4. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor. 5. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Single-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch. c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A. d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.
3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. 4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat (ducted split system): Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B. Outdoor Air temperature sensor.
C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
E. Drain Hose: For condensate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
D. Refrigerant Charging:
1. Perform Triple-Evacuation procedure prior to charging system, or evacuate system in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommended procedure, whichever is more stringent.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 238126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 6 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
C. Conductors: Copper, complying with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
1. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for type THHN/THWN-2.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS
A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Concrete: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:
a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram. b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:
1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey.
c. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.
3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:
1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit five copies of each submittal. A maximum of two marked copies will be returned to the contractor, or one additional reproducible copy may be submitted to be marked and returned for contractor’s use.
B. Identify each item submittal using applicable specification section number and paragraph reference.
C. Submittals shall be approved by contractor and those subcontractors whose work is associated with the subject equipment as being in accordance with contract documents, prior to submission to the Owner.
D. Informational Submittals
1. Field quality-control reports.
E. Closeout Submittals
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features based on NETA MTS.
1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not. 2) Include recommended testing intervals.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 AWG unless otherwise indicated on drawings, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 6. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size as indicated on drawings, stranded conductor.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors. 3. Connections to Ground Rods: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified.
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test location. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Unit Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit five copies of each submittal. A maximum of two marked copies will be returned to the contractor, or one additional reproducible copy may be submitted to be marked and returned for contractor’s use.
B. Identify each item submittal using applicable specification section number and paragraph reference.
C. Submittals shall be approved by contractor and those subcontractors whose work is associated with the subject equipment as being in accordance with contract documents, prior to submission to the Owner.
D. Shop drawings submittals based upon catalog information shall be noted to indicate specific items and options to be supplied.
E. Action Submittals
1. Product Data: For each type of product.
a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following:
1) Hangers. 2) Steel slotted support systems. 3) Trapeze hangers. 4) Brackets
b. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Conduit Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway to be supported.
C. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
D. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for attached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this section are stricter.
B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceways: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings, and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.
B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 5. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel. b. Type: compression.
E. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.2 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
A. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.
B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.
C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.
F. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
G. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
H. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
I. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
J. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Formula in first subparagraph below provides about 15 percent safety factor (extra expansion-contraction capability). Retain option in "Flexible Conduit Connections" Paragraph below if flexible connections are required for recessed and semirecessed luminaires.
K. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification of power cables. 2. Identification for conductors. 3. Miscellaneous identification products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
D. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
2.2 LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil thick, polyester or vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.
2.3 TAGS
A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory screened or printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
2.4 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, and Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 Deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification product.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
D. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.
E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
F. System Identification for Raceways and Cables under 600 V: Identification shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place identification of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
1. Secure tight to surface of conductor, cable, or raceway.
G. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels, signs, and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
H. Vinyl Wraparound Labels:
1. Secure tight to surface of raceway or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. 2. Attach labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
I. Snap-around Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
J. Self-Adhesive Wraparound Labels: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
K. Snap-around Color-Coding Bands: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
L. Heat-Shrink, Preprinted Tubes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
M. Marker Tapes: Secure tight to surface at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
N. Cable Ties: General purpose, for attaching tags.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power More Than 600V: Self- adhesive warning labels.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual. Apply labels to transformers, panelboards, and disconnect switches.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic label or Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic label, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Unless labels are provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten them with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.
B. NO: Normally open.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit five copies of each submittal. A maximum of two marked copies will be returned to the contractor, or one additional reproducible copy may be submitted to be marked and returned for contractor’s use.
B. Identify each item submittal using applicable specification section number and paragraph reference.
C. Submittals shall be approved by contractor and those subcontractors whose work is associated with the subject equipment as being in accordance with contract documents, prior to submission to the Owner.
D. Shop drawings submittals based upon catalog information shall be noted to indicate specific items and options to be supplied.
E. Action Submittals:
1. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes. 2. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
a. Show tabulations of the following:
1) Each installed unit's type and details. 2) Factory-installed devices. 3) Nameplate legends. 4) Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. 5) Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 6) Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.
F. Informational Submittals
1. Field quality-control reports. 2. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.
G. Closeout Submittals
1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include the following:
a. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Type HD, Heavy Duty:
1. Single throw. 2. Three pole. 3. 600-V ac. 4. 1200 A and smaller. 5. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses. 6. Lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
B. Accessories:
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. Contact rating - 120-V ac. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 7. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Type GD, General Duty, Three Pole, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
B. Accessories:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 4. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: UL 489, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
B. Dry and Clean Indoor locations: Type 1.
C. Wet or Damp locations outdoors: Type 3R.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Commencement of work shall indicate Installer's acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install fuses in fusible devices.
D. Comply with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections for Switches:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. c. Verify that the unit is clean. d. Verify blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and mechanical operation. e. Verify that fuse sizes and types match the Specifications and Drawings. f. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact integrity. g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the two following methods:
1) Use a low-resistance ohmmeter.
a) Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS Table 100.12.
a) Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS Table 100.12.
h. Verify that operation and sequencing of interlocking systems is as described in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. i. Verify correct phase barrier installation. j. Verify lubrication of moving current-carrying parts and moving and sliding surfaces.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5 ARRENDALE STATE PRISON CHAPEL HVAC UPGRADE GEORGIA DEPT. OF CORRECTIONS JANUARY 30, 2017
published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data. d. Measure fuse resistance. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent. e. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage." 3.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6